JP7719040B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, that allow players to play games.

Gaming machines have been proposed in the past that execute a fanfare effect when controlled to enter a jackpot gaming state. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that executes a fanfare effect when a jackpot occurs.

JP 2019-169780 A (paragraph 0304)

Regarding gaming machines such as those described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in the sequence in which a jackpot is hit, a fanfare effect is executed, jackpot in-game effects are executed, and the jackpot ends.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to improve the presentation that occurs when a jackpot is hit, a fanfare presentation is executed, presentations during the jackpot are executed, and the jackpot ends.

(A) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of specific identification information, and capable of controlling the gaming machine to a state that is more advantageous to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
a performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
a variable winning means that can be controlled to a first state in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
a round control means for controlling the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state in the advantageous state, and capable of executing a round game a plurality of times;
A display means;
a performance means that can be arranged at a position superimposed on the display means and is used for performance;
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control to a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The presentation means includes a first presentation means and a second presentation means,
The performance execution means
In the last round of the multiple rounds of play, during a predetermined period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state until when the variable winning means is controlled to the special state, an addiction prevention display for preventing addiction to the game can be displayed,
During the predetermined period, a predetermined display relating to the number of gaming media acquired during the advantageous state can be displayed;
An error message can be displayed to notify the user that an error has occurred.
If an error occurs while the anti-slip display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-slip display,
When controlled to the advantageous state, a title display corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
When the game is controlled to be in the advantageous state, an operation prompting display can be displayed that suggests an operation method corresponding to the advantageous state,
the title display is displayed at a display position and size that reduces the visibility of a part of the title display by the second effect producing means,
the error display is displayed by the first effect means and the second effect means at a display position and size that do not reduce the visibility of the error display,
The predetermined display is larger than the anti-slip display,
the operation prompting display includes a first operation prompting display displayed on the display means and a second operation prompting display displayed on the display means,
the first operation prompting display is displayed at a display position and size such that visibility of a part of the first operation prompting display is reduced by the first effecting means, and such that visibility of a part of the first operation prompting display is not reduced by the second effecting means;
the second operation prompting display is displayed by the first effect means and the second effect means at a display position and size that do not reduce visibility of a part of the second operation prompting display;
It is characterized by:
Other gaming machines include:
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of specific identification information, and deriving a specific display result as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information, thereby being controllable to an advantageous state that is more advantageous to a player than a normal state,
a performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
A display means;
a performance means that can be arranged at a position superimposed on the display means and is used for performance;
The performance execution means
In connection with the end of the advantageous state, an addiction prevention display for preventing addiction to the game can be displayed;
An error message can be displayed to notify the user that an error has occurred.
If an error occurs while the anti-slip display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-slip display,
When controlled to the advantageous state, a title display corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error message can be displayed to notify the user that an error has occurred.
the title display is displayed at a display position and size that reduces the visibility of a part of the title display by the effecting means,
The error display is displayed by the effecting means at a position and size that does not reduce the visibility of the error display.

The present invention may have only the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention, or it may have both the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention and features other than those specific features.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at characteristic part 02TM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. An explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type detailed information table. An explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for normal conditions. An explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for time-saving mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for ST state. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing an operation instruction effect list table, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing an error notification effect list table. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of an abnormal operation method instruction presentation determination process. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing a condition table related to an abnormal operation method instruction, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing a condition table related to an error notification. A flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the end of a presentation when a jackpot begins. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a game flow. 1A is a conceptual diagram showing a typical layer structure, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram of the layer structure. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to abnormal left-hit instructions in normal mode. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the abnormal left hit instruction (LV1) in normal mode. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the abnormal left hit instruction (LV2) in normal mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to error notification in normal mode. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to error notification in normal mode. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to the abnormal left-hit instruction in normal mode and the jackpot FF effect in right-hit mode. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the abnormal left-hit instruction in normal mode and the jackpot FF effect in right-hit mode. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to error notification in normal mode and jackpot FF effect in right-hit mode. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to error notification in normal mode and jackpot FF effect in right-hit mode. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to the abnormal left-hit instruction and error notification in normal mode, and the jackpot FF effect in right-hit mode. This is a time chart showing the timing of execution of each effect related to the abnormal left pair instruction and error notification in normal mode, and the jackpot FF effect in right hit mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an amusement arcade where gaming machines are installed. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to abnormal right-hit instructions in right-hit mode. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to abnormal right hit instructions in right hit mode. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect when an abnormal left hit is detected during the jackpot FF period in right hit mode. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when an abnormal left hit is detected during the jackpot FF period in right hit mode. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to abnormal right-hit instructions during the jackpot RD period in right-hit mode. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to abnormal right-hit instructions during the jackpot RD period in right-hit mode. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a volume adjustment effect determination process. 10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of each effect related to volume adjustment. 10 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to volume adjustment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a light intensity adjustment effect determination process. 10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of various effects related to light intensity adjustment. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to light intensity adjustment. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of volume adjustment in normal mode and each performance related to the jackpot FF performance in right-hand mode. This is a time chart showing the timing of execution of each performance related to volume adjustment in normal mode and jackpot FF performance in right-hit mode. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of light intensity adjustment in normal mode and jackpot FF effects in right-hand mode. This is a time chart showing the timing of the light intensity adjustment in normal mode and the execution of each performance related to the jackpot FF performance in right-hand mode. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of an auto button setting effect determination process. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to the auto button OFF mode. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to the auto button ON mode. FIG. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to the auto button OFF setting effect in normal mode and the jackpot FF effect in right-hand mode. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the auto button OFF setting effect in normal mode and the jackpot FF effect in right-hand mode. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to the auto button ON setting effect in normal mode and the jackpot FF effect in right-hand mode. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the auto button ON/OFF setting effect in normal mode and the jackpot FF effect in right-hand mode. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect when the volume adjustment display, light intensity adjustment display, and auto button setting display are displayed simultaneously. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect when the volume adjustment display, light intensity adjustment display, and auto button setting display are displayed simultaneously. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the volume adjustment display, light intensity adjustment display, and auto button setting display are displayed simultaneously. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to the jackpot FF effects (Part 1) corresponding to jackpot A and jackpot B. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to the jackpot FF effect (Part 1) corresponding to jackpot C. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to the jackpot FF effects corresponding to jackpot A and jackpot B, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to the jackpot FF effects corresponding to jackpot C. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the jackpot FF effects corresponding to jackpot A and jackpot B. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the jackpot FF effect corresponding to jackpot C. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to error notification during the jackpot FF effect corresponding to jackpot A and jackpot B in the right-hand hit mode, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to error notification during the jackpot FF effect corresponding to jackpot C in the right-hand hit mode. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to error notification during the jackpot FF effect corresponding to jackpot A and jackpot B in right-hit mode. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to error notification during the jackpot FF effect corresponding to jackpot C in right-hit mode. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to the jackpot ED effect corresponding to jackpot A, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to the jackpot ED effect corresponding to jackpot B. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the jackpot ED effect corresponding to jackpot A. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the jackpot ED effect corresponding to jackpot B. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to the jackpot ED effect corresponding to jackpot C. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the jackpot ED effect corresponding to jackpot C. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to error notification during the jackpot ED effect in right-hit mode. This is a time chart showing the timing of execution of each effect related to error notification during the jackpot ED effect in right-hit mode. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to the winning prize ball update effect. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the winning ball update effect. FIG. 2 is a front view of the accessory and the image display device. (A) An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to error notification during the jackpot FF effect (Part 1) in a gaming machine equipped with a role device, and an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each effect related to error notification during the jackpot FF effect (Part 2) in a gaming machine equipped with a role device. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each performance when the mode is controlled to the normal mode after the time-saving mode is switched to. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance when the mode is controlled to the normal mode after transitioning to the time-saving mode. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of each performance when the mode is controlled to normal mode after transitioning to ST mode. 10 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance when the mode is controlled to normal mode after transitioning to ST mode.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched into this gaming area by a predetermined ball launching device.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions on the gaming board 2 (to the right of the gaming area in the example shown in Figure 1), which perform a variable display (also called a special symbol game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. Special symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Special symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also referred to as the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also referred to as the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The synchronously executed special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The pending display and active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to a variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories using the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories using the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable ball entry device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start entry opening that changes between a closed and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 2). The variable ball entry device 6B, for example, comprises an electric tulip-type device with a pair of movable wings. When the solenoid 81 is off, the movable wings are positioned vertically, bringing the tips of the movable wings close to the ball entry device 6A, creating a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second start entry opening (also referred to as the second start entry opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is on, the movable wings of the variable ball entry device 6B are tilted, creating an open state in which game balls can enter the second start entry opening (also referred to as the second start entry opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start entry opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out, and the second special game can be initiated. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices equipped with an electric tulip-type device.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, four locations at the bottom left and right of the game area), and are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 with a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming board 2 (to the left of the gaming area in the example shown in Figure 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, there is a normal symbol pending display 25C. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a designated ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, which the player can press to issue a specific command. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or small win game state (a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a specified upper limit (for example, 4).

In special symbol games, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a specific special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a small jackpot symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "small jackpot." Also, if a special symbol different from the jackpot or small jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "loss."

After the display result in the special game becomes "big hit," the game state is controlled to a big hit game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit," the game state is controlled to a small hit game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot slot (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, probability variable state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, and jackpot types that offer few or no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 opens in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening opens in the same opening mode as the large prize game state for certain large win types (the number of times the large prize opening opens is the same as the number of rounds mentioned above, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large win types, small win types may also be set for "small wins."

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is implemented, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations, but also makes it easier to win a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the condition for the special game to end is played a predetermined number of times is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability variation state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state will not change, and the game state will continue to be controlled as it was before the special game display result became "small win" (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game for the specified number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the special game display result does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within the jackpot opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game state.

(Progression of the production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the progress of the game or adding excitement to the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. Note that these effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of these displays, they may also be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and/or by turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, etc.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. When the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line-up, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (regular jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line-up. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (regular symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot."

When the display result of the special game is a "small win," a fixed decorative pattern (e.g., "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that form chance eyes are displayed stationary on predetermined effective lines in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be displayed when the display result of the special game is a "jackpot" for certain jackpot types (jackpot types in jackpot game states that are similar to small win game states) and when it is a "small win."

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). A pre-read preview effect may be executed that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect announcing the number of rounds or an upgrade effect indicating that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing. Also, during a small jackpot gaming state, a small jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the small jackpot gaming state. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether they are currently in a small jackpot gaming state or a jackpot gaming state by executing a common effect during a small jackpot gaming state and a jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (jackpot types in a jackpot gaming state similar to a small jackpot gaming state, for example, a jackpot type that sets the subsequent gaming state to a high-probability state). In such cases, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether they are currently in a small jackpot gaming state or a jackpot gaming state by executing a common effect after the end of the small jackpot gaming state and the end of the jackpot gaming state.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), big win game status, small win game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches used to detect game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), and count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying the image display unit 5 with a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 also supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the audio control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and turn the game effect lamp 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal that operates the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

Note that the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of audio output, turning on/off of lamps (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying signals to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 3, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and making RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also sends a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). Upon receiving the presentation control command, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a screen on, for example, the image display device 5 to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (Step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in RAM 102 (backup RAM) (Step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes power supply interruption processing immediately before the machine becomes inoperable due to the power supply interruption. This power supply interruption processing includes processing to turn on a backup flag indicating that data is being backed up in RAM 102 and processing to protect data in RAM 102. The data protection processing includes adding error detection codes (checksums, parity bits, etc.) and backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including the status of various flags and various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In Step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is OFF and no backup data is stored in RAM 102 (Step S4; No), initialization processing (Step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (Step S4: Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (Step S5). In Step S5, it determines whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time of power outage, for example, using a parity bit or checksum. If it is determined that they match, it determines that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when power was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5: Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when power was stopped. During the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets up a working area based on the contents of RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when power was stopped, and if a special symbol was changing, the game control timer interrupt process, described below, is executed to resume the change of the special symbol from the state before recovery.

The CPU 103 then transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 instructing recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the currently playing special symbol game, may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify players that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, it sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and enables the interrupt (step S12). After that, it enters a loop process. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), allowing the CPU 103 to periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issue a warning based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output processing to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and reservation of special symbol games, controls the big hit game state and small hit game state, and controls the game state (details will be described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to manage the execution and reservation of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), and to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the presentation control command that has been set to be sent is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 4. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the determination results, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command thus transmitted and set for the start winning is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in Figure 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings are made to transmit the effect control commands corresponding to each step to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or a "small jackpot," and if a "jackpot" is selected, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed, based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol, a small jackpot symbol, or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. The special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which they enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether the display result will be a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. When the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes settings to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B and to stop and display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that results in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8." If the display result is a "miss," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0." If the display result is a "small hit" or "miss," the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-limiting state is established. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process of step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum opening period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on the type of jackpot, for example. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6" and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds that open the jackpot entry port has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process to set the jackpot game state to end when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5", while if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes waiting for the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify the end of the jackpot game state, is executed, and making various settings to start special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0" and the jackpot end process ends.

The pre-processing for opening a small win in step S118 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "8". This pre-processing for opening a small win includes processing to set the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "9", and the pre-processing for opening a small win ends.

The small win open processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special prize process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes processing to measure the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and processing to determine whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special prize process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "10". This small win end process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation announcing the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 prior to the small win game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 6. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 6 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. It also executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). The performance control process controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving of the movable body 32. In addition, the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices is judged, determined, and set in accordance with the performance control commands sent from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 is updated by software. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

Figure 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 6 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute a pre-reading notice performance based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processing steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of a performance process flag stored in RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process determines the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to an instruction (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to an instruction (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 stops the display of the final decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the stop display of the final decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol win wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3." In this special symbol win wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a big hit game state or a small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command specifying the start of a big hit game state or a small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big hit game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "6." On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small hit game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4," which corresponds to the small hit presentation process. Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a big hit game state or a small hit game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is determined that the display result in the special symbol game was a "miss," and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0." Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process will end.

The small win presentation processing in step S174 is executed when the presentation control process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the small win gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the small win gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation processing is terminated.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation control process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the small win end presentation process is terminated.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S176 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "6." During this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, during the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation control process flag is updated to "7," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variations of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible within the scope that does not deviate from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol showing "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing that symbol. Furthermore, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, that symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not show the symbol showing "-").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 via a removable recording medium, but may also be distributed by being pre-installed on a storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, by providing a communications processing unit, the programs and data for realizing the present invention may also be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communications line, etc.

Games can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by downloading programs and data via a communication line, temporarily storing them in internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game can also be executed by exchanging data with another computer device via a network.

In this specification, expressions used to compare various percentages, such as the execution rate of effects (such as "high," "low," and "different") may include cases where one is a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes cases where one is a "0%" percentage and the other is a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%."

[Feature 02TM]
Next, the [characteristic portion 02TM] will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-74.
In this embodiment, when the game state is controlled to the normal state where a left hit is required and the player accidentally hits the right, an abnormal left hit instruction can be executed to instruct the player to hit the left. When this abnormal left hit instruction is being executed, if the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state and a jackpot fanfare effect is executed, the execution of the abnormal left hit instruction that was being executed can be terminated.

[Board composition]
FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment.
As shown in Figure 8-1, in the pachinko game machine 1, in the game area, a first path of the flow paths along which game balls flow is mainly located in the area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and a second path of the flow paths along which game balls flow, which is different from the first path, is mainly located in the area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 to make it flow down the first path is called a left hit. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 to make it flow down the second path is called a right hit. The first path is a path that allows game balls to flow down by hitting the game ball into the left side of the game area, so it may also be called the left hit path. Furthermore, the second path is a path that allows game balls to flow down by hitting the game ball into the right side of the game area, so it may also be called the right hit path.

The first and second paths may be separate paths, or may share a portion of the path. The left and right play areas may be separated, for example, by the edge of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the play pins within the play area.

When a gaming ball is launched from the ball launching device in response to operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the gaming area, if it is guided to the left gaming area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of gaming pins, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the right gaming area. Furthermore, when a gaming ball is guided to the right gaming area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of gaming pins, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the left gaming area.

A winning ball device 6A, which constitutes the first starting winning hole, is provided as a structure through which game balls hit into the left game area of the game area can enter.

The structures through which game balls hit into the right game area can enter include a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B that constitutes the second starting winning opening, and a special variable winning ball device 7 that constitutes the large winning opening.

In the left play area, game nails are set in place to guide the game ball to the winning ball device 6A in the prize opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter the winning ball device 6A, the player simply hits the game ball to the left. In the right play area, game nails are set in place to guide the game ball to the variable winning ball device 6B, passing gate 41, and special variable winning ball device 7 in the prize opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, passing gate 41, and special variable winning ball device 7, the player simply hits the game ball to the right.

It is also possible for a game ball hit into the right game area to have the potential to enter the winning ball device 6A, but from a playability perspective, it is desirable that this possibility be extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the left game area entering them. Conversely, it is also possible for a game ball hit into the left game area to have the potential to enter the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, but from a playability perspective, it is desirable that this possibility be extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the right game area entering them.

In this embodiment, a special variable winning ball device 7 with a large winning opening is provided in the lower right section of the image display device 5 (between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid (not shown), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

(Jackpot round control)
In this embodiment, when the CPU 103 is controlling the jackpot game state, (A) when a jackpot round start command is sent, the CPU 103 changes the special variable winning ball device 7 from a closed state to an open state, and performs opening control of the special variable winning ball device 7 to make it easier for game balls to enter the large winning hole; (B) when a jackpot round end command is sent, the CPU 103 changes the special variable winning ball device 7 from an open state to a closed state, and performs closing control of the special variable winning ball device 7 to make it harder for game balls to enter the large winning hole. This series of controls (A) and (B) is referred to as "jackpot RD control" (jackpot round control). The opening control of the special variable winning ball device 7 in (A) is appropriately referred to as "attacker opening control," and the closing control of the special variable winning ball device 7 in (B) is appropriately referred to as "attacker closing control." The jackpot RD control is executed the number of times equal to the number of jackpot rounds.

In this embodiment, in the nth round of jackpot RD control (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot RD control (nth round)"), the nth round of attacker close control is executed, and the jackpot RD control (nth round) ends. Then, the next attacker open control is executed, and the jackpot RD control (n+1th round) begins.

In this embodiment, during jackpot RD control, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled from an open state to a closed state when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enters the large winning opening, or when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the special variable winning ball device 7 was controlled to an open state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enters the large prize opening during jackpot RD control, if the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled from an open state to a closed state, it is possible that more game balls than the predetermined number (e.g., 10 balls) may enter the large prize opening. In this manner, when more game balls than the predetermined number enter the large prize opening during jackpot RD control, and more prize balls than the number originally expected to be awarded are awarded, this is referred to as an "over-winning." With the design of the game board in this embodiment, an over-winning is extremely rare, and even if an over-winning does occur, the number of game balls that can be awarded during one jackpot RD control is limited to "one."

In this embodiment, the large prize opening is provided with a V prize opening and an outlet located downstream of the V prize opening. A variable V prize opening device (V lid) is also provided upstream of the V prize opening. The variable V prize opening device is switched between a closed and an open state by a solenoid. In other words, game balls flowing down the large prize opening can pass through the V prize opening when the variable V prize opening device is in the open state, but cannot pass through the V prize opening and instead flow down to the outlet when the variable V prize opening device is in the closed state.

The main board 11 is provided with a V switch (not shown) that can detect, via the switch circuit 110, when a gaming ball has passed through the V entry port located downstream of the large entry port, and an ejection switch (not shown) that can detect when a gaming ball has passed through the ejection port.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is made of a transparent material, allowing the player to see the game balls passing through it. This special variable winning ball device 7 may be equipped with an LED lamp or other effect device, and may perform a light-emitting effect by illuminating (flashing) the LED lamp at a predetermined timing (for example, when a game ball enters the large prize opening). In this case, when a game ball enters the large prize opening, the special variable winning ball device 7 performs a light-emitting effect, and the image display device 5 performs the acquired prize ball update effect described below, further increasing the excitement during jackpot play.

In this embodiment, although not shown in Figure 8-1, first and second reels are provided near the image display device 5. The installation positions of the first and second reels and whether they are movable will be explained in Figure 8-69, which will be described later.

[Normal state, time-saving state, probability change state]
In this embodiment, in the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average normal symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the normal symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and improving the probability of a "normal symbol hit" in the normal symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is implemented, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations, but also makes it easier to win a "jackpot."

The time-saving state and the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met first: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the termination condition is that a predetermined number of special games have been played is called a count-limited state (count-limited time-saving state, count-limited probability variation state, etc.), and in this example, this type of game state is called the "ST state."

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

In this embodiment, when the game state is in a low probability/low base state, it is referred to as the "normal state," when the game state is in a low probability/high base state, it is referred to as the "time-saving state," and when the game state is in a high probability/high base state, it is referred to as the "ST state." Furthermore, in this embodiment, "game modes" are provided as modes corresponding to the game states, and details will be explained in the game flow of Figures 8-12 below.

[Random value]
8-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 8-2, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are countable.

Note that random number values other than these may also be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 using different random counters and updated by software, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip separate from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random number values MR1 to MR5 are set within the ranges shown in Figure 8-2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of these random number values MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the settings set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program, enabling it to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

[Table Data]
The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variable pattern table storing a plurality of variable patterns that become the variable display modes of each symbol in the variable display of special symbols, normal symbols, etc.

The determination tables stored in ROM 101 include a display result determination table, a jackpot type determination table, a jackpot type detailed information table (not shown), a fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal map display result determination table (not shown), and a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown).

<Display result determination table>
8-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol and a display result determination table for the second special symbol stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 8-3(A1) is a table for determining the display result using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning slot (i.e., when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). Also, FIG. 8-3(A2) is a table for determining the display result using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (i.e., when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed).

When the CPU 103 detects a start winning entry into the first start winning entry slot (first start winning entry) or a start winning entry into the second start winning entry slot (second start winning entry), it samples the count value (MR1) of the random number circuit 124 at a predetermined timing. For the first start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination values set in the display result determination table for the first special symbol, and if the extracted value matches one of the jackpot determination values, it determines that a jackpot has occurred for the first special symbol. For the second start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination values set in the display result determination table for the second special symbol, and if the extracted value matches one of the jackpot determination values, it determines that a jackpot has occurred for the second special symbol.

Figure 8-3 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table. Figure 8-3 (A1) shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table [for first special symbol] used when the special symbol in the variable display is the first special symbol, and Figure 8-3 (A2) shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table [for second special symbol] used when the special symbol in the variable display is the second special symbol. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result determination table, a win determination value compared with random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. Random number value MR1 is a random number value used to determine the display result, and its value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 8-3 (A1), when the special pattern of the variable display is the first special pattern, if the game state is a low probability state (normal state or time-saving state), the value can take on a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result, 1020 to 1224 are assigned to a "jackpot," and other numerical ranges are assigned to a "miss."
Furthermore, when the game state is in a high probability state (high probability state), of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1680 are assigned to a "jackpot", and other numerical ranges are assigned to a "miss".

As shown in Figure 8-3 (A2), when the special pattern of the variable display is the second special pattern, if the game state is a low probability state (normal state or time-saving state), the value can take on a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result, 1020 to 1224 are assigned to a "jackpot," and other numerical ranges are assigned to a "miss."
Furthermore, when the game state is in a high probability state (high probability state), of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1680 are assigned to a "jackpot", and other numerical ranges are assigned to a "miss".

(Jackpot type determination table)
Figure 8-3 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] and the jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol] stored in ROM 101. Of these, Figure 8-3 (B1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, Figure 8-3 (B2) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced when a decision is made to use the variable display result as a jackpot pattern to determine the type of jackpot as either "jackpot A," "jackpot B," or "jackpot C" (see Figure 8-4) based on the random number (MR2) used for jackpot type determination.

The types of jackpots in this embodiment will now be explained using Figures 8-4 (1) and (2). In this embodiment, the jackpot types include "Jackpot A," in which time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 100 variable displays after the jackpot gaming state ends, and "Jackpot B" and "Jackpot C," in which time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 154 variable displays after the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, in this embodiment, a control state in which time-saving control is not executed will be referred to as "non-time-saving control" or the like, as appropriate.

Furthermore, these "Jackpot A," "Jackpot B," and "Jackpot C" are jackpots in which the game ball enters the V prize slot after entering the large prize slot in the first round of the jackpot game state, resulting in the execution of high probability control for up to 154 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the control state in which high probability control is not executed is referred to as "non-high probability control" or "low probability control," etc., as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the open state of the variable V ball entry device (V lid) includes a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds), in which the open state lasts for a short period of time, and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds), in which the open state lasts for a long period of time. "Jackpot A" places the variable V ball entry device in a short open state during the first round of the jackpot gaming state, while "Jackpot B" and "Jackpot C" place the variable V ball entry device in a long open state during the first round of the jackpot gaming state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the jackpot entry port to an opening state advantageous to the player in rounds 1 through 3. Furthermore, in "Jackpot A," the variable V entry ball device enters a short opening state in the first round, making it extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the V entry port, and since it is not possible to expect the probability variable control to be executed, it is essentially a "normal jackpot." Below, "Jackpot A" will be referred to as a "3R normal jackpot," "normal jackpot," "3R jackpot," etc. as appropriate.

In this "Big Hit A," if the game ball enters the V winning slot, which is irregular, high probability control will be executed for a maximum of 154 variable display cycles. Therefore, in this case, high probability control and time-saving control will be executed for a maximum of 100 variable display cycles, and then high probability control and non-time-saving control will be executed for a maximum of 54 variable display cycles.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the large prize entry port to an opening state advantageous to the player in rounds 1 through 10. Furthermore, in "Jackpot B," the variable V prize entry device enters a long opening state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and since probability variable control can be expected to be executed, it is essentially a probability variable jackpot. Below, "Jackpot B" will be referred to as a "3R probability variable jackpot," "probability variable jackpot," or "10R jackpot" as appropriate.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the large prize entry port to an opening state advantageous to the player in rounds 1 through 10. Furthermore, with "Jackpot C," the variable V prize entry device enters a long opening state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and since it is expected that probability variable control will be executed, it is essentially a probability variable jackpot. Below, "Jackpot C" will be referred to as a "10R probability variable jackpot," "probability variable jackpot," or "10R jackpot" as appropriate.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which three types of jackpots are provided: "Jackpot A," "Jackpot B," and "Jackpot C." However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be three or more types of jackpots.

As shown in Figure 8-3 (B1), in the jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 149 is assigned to "jackpot A" and 150 to 299 is assigned to "jackpot B." On the other hand, as shown in Figure 8-3 (B2), in the jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, all determination values are assigned to "jackpot C."

In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, there is a 50% chance that the game ball will enter the V entry slot in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both probability variable control and time-saving control will be implemented after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% chance that the game ball will enter the V entry slot in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both probability variable control and time-saving control will be implemented after the jackpot game ends.

In this example, even if a "jackpot A" occurs, it is possible, but extremely rare, for a V win to occur when the V lid is in a short open state, so in the case of a "jackpot A," it will be explained as not resulting in a V win and no special rate control being executed. Also, even if a "jackpot B" or "jackpot C" occurs, it is possible, but extremely rare, for a V win not to occur when the V lid is in a long open state, so in the case of a "jackpot B" or "jackpot C," it will be explained as resulting in a V win and special rate control being executed.

In the above embodiment, as shown in the explanation of the jackpot types in Figure 8-4, an example was shown in which the number of times the variable probability control and the number of times the time-saving control were performed were the same regardless of the gaming state, but this is not limited to this form, and the number of times the variable probability control and the number of times the time-saving control were performed may also be varied depending on the gaming state.

For example, as mentioned above, when the system is controlled to a low base state in which the variable display of the first special symbol should primarily be executed, if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result of the variable display is "Jack Hit A," low-probability control and time-saving control are executed for a maximum of 100 variable displays after the jackpot gaming state ends. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which when the system is controlled to a high base state in which the variable display of the second special symbol should primarily be executed, if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result of the variable display is "Jack Hit A," low-probability control and time-saving control are executed for a maximum of 450 variable displays after the jackpot gaming state ends.

With this configuration, even if the first special symbol variable display is executed when the high base state is being controlled and the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot," the number of time-saving control times will be increased by a maximum of 450 times, more than the usual "maximum of 100 times," preventing the player from being at an excessive disadvantage.

In this embodiment, the type of jackpot is determined using MR2, a random number value used to determine the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot may also be determined using MR1, a random number value used to determine the result of the special chart display.

[Fluctuation pattern]
8-5 to 8-7 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table in this embodiment.
Figure 8-5 shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state (normal mode described later) (hereinafter referred to as the "fluctuation pattern determination table [for the normal state (normal mode)]" as appropriate).
Figure 8-6 shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state (right-hit mode: time-saving mode described later) (hereinafter referred to as the ``fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state (right-hit mode: time-saving mode)'' as appropriate).
Figure 8-7 shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for the ST state (the right-hand hitting mode: ST mode described below) (hereinafter referred to as the "fluctuation pattern determination table [for the ST state (right-hand hitting mode: ST mode)]" as appropriate).
Of these, (1) in Figures 8-5 to 8-7 show a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss (hereinafter referred to as the "fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss" where appropriate), and (2) in Figures 8-5 to 8-7 show a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the "fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot" where appropriate).

<Fluctuation pattern without reach>
In this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern that does not involve a reach (such as "non-reach miss,""high-speed B miss,""high-speed C miss," and "high-speed C miss result display") is a fluctuation pattern in which, after the fluctuation display has started, a reach is not achieved and a combination of decorative symbols is displayed in a stopped state, indicating that the fluctuation display result is a "miss."

In this embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve a reach, if the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a "non-reach miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 5000 ms, if the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a "high-speed B miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 3000 ms, if the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a "high-speed C miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 2000 ms, and if the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a "high-speed C miss result display" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 6000 ms.

In this embodiment, the "High-speed C miss result display" variation pattern is a variation pattern that is executed only in the final variation of the ST state, and after the "High-speed C miss" variation pattern is executed, a result display including information related to the number of prize balls awarded to the player and the number of jackpots is displayed.

<Fluctuating patterns with normal reach>
In this embodiment, a variation pattern accompanying a normal reach ("normal reach A miss,""normal reach A jackpot,""normal reach B miss,""normal reach B jackpot,""normal reach C miss,""normal reach C jackpot") means that after the reach state is established, the final display result is confirmed and stopped without the super reach presentation described below being executed.

In this embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns involving normal reaches, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a "normal reach A miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 30,000 ms, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a "normal reach A jackpot" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 35,000 ms, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a "normal reach B miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 20,000 ms, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a "normal reach B jackpot" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 22,000 ms, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a "normal reach C miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 15,000 ms, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a "normal reach C jackpot" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 17,000 ms.

<Fluctuating patterns with super reach>
In this embodiment, in a variation pattern involving a super reach ("SP reach A miss,""SP reach A jackpot,""SP reach B miss,""SP reach B jackpot,""SP reach C miss,""SP reach C jackpot"), the final display result is confirmed and stopped by executing a super reach effect that notifies whether or not a jackpot has been won.

(Super reach effect (battle effect))
In this embodiment, in a variation pattern involving a super reach, when the variation display starts, a reach state is established, and a super reach effect (hereinafter referred to as a "battle effect" as appropriate) is executed, which notifies whether or not a jackpot has been won by a battle between an ally character and an enemy character. Here, if the final display result is a "miss," an effect is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (defeat effect). On the other hand, if the final display result is a "jackpot," an effect is executed in which the ally character wins against the enemy character (victory effect).

In this embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns involving super reaches, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be an "SP reach A miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 90,000 ms, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be an "SP reach A jackpot" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 100,000 ms, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be an "SP reach B miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 60,000 ms, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be an "SP reach B jackpot" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 62,000 ms, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be an "SP reach C miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 45,000 ms, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be an "SP reach C jackpot" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 47,000 ms.

<[Normal state (normal mode)] Fluctuation pattern determination table>
FIG. 8-5 is a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state (normal mode) in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 8-5 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 950 are assigned to the "non-reach miss" fluctuation pattern, 951 to 990 are assigned to the "normal reach A miss" fluctuation pattern, and 991 to 997 are assigned to the "SP reach A miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 8-5 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 100 are assigned to the "normal reach A jackpot" fluctuation pattern, and 101 to 997 are assigned to the "SP reach A jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

<[Time-saving state (right-hand mode: time-saving mode)] Fluctuation pattern determination table>
Figure 8-6 is a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state (right-hand hit mode: time-saving mode) in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 8-6 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 950 are assigned to the "high-speed B miss" fluctuation pattern, 951 to 990 are assigned to the "normal reach B miss" fluctuation pattern, and 991 to 997 are assigned to the "SP reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 8-6 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 50 are assigned to the "high-speed B jackpot" fluctuation pattern, 51 to 150 are assigned to the "normal reach B jackpot" fluctuation pattern, and 151 to 997 are assigned to the "SP reach B jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

<[ST state (right-hand mode: ST mode)] Variation pattern determination table>
Figure 8-7 is a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for ST state (right-hand hitting mode: ST mode) in this embodiment.
Figure 8-7 (A) is a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for [ST state (right-hand hitting mode: ST mode) <1st to 153rd spin>] in this embodiment, and Figure 8-7 (B) is a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for [ST state (right-hand hitting mode: ST mode) <154th spin>] in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 8-7 (A): (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 970 are assigned to the "high-speed C miss" fluctuation pattern, 971 to 993 are assigned to the "normal reach C miss" fluctuation pattern, and 994 to 997 are assigned to the "SP reach C miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 8-7(A):(2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 300 are assigned to the "high-speed C jackpot" fluctuation pattern, 301 to 600 are assigned to the "normal reach C jackpot" fluctuation pattern, and 601 to 997 are assigned to the "SP reach C jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 8-7 (B): (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table, all judgment values within the range of 1 to 997 for MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "High-speed C miss + result display."

The table shown in Figure 8-7(B):(2) is similar to the table shown in Figure 8-7(A):(2) described above, so its explanation will be omitted.

[Operation instructions]
In this embodiment, when the game is controlled to a gaming state where a specific operation method is required, an operation method instruction effect can be executed to instruct the player to play using the correct operation method. This operation method instruction effect includes a normal operation method instruction effect and an abnormal operation method instruction effect. Hereinafter, the operation method instruction effect will be referred to as an "operation method instruction" as appropriate.

(Normal operation instructions)
In this embodiment, when the game is controlled to a game state where a specific operation method is required, a normal operation method instruction effect can be executed to instruct the player to play using the correct operation method. This normal operation method instruction effect is executed at a predetermined execution timing, regardless of whether the player is playing using the correct operation method or the wrong operation method.

In this embodiment, when the machine is controlled from right-hand hitting mode, which requires playing with the right hand, to normal mode (left-hand hitting mode), which requires playing with the left hand (in this example, immediately after being controlled to normal mode), a normal left-hand hitting instruction effect can be executed, instructing the player to play with the left hand, which is the correct operating method. This normal left-hand hitting instruction effect is executed regardless of whether the player is playing with the left hand, which is the correct operating method, or whether the player is playing with the right hand, which is the incorrect operating method.

In addition, when the machine is controlled to a right-hit mode (jackpot mode, time-saving mode, ST mode) in which right-hit play is required (in this example, immediately after control is applied to right-hit mode), a normal right-hit instruction effect can be executed, instructing the player to play with right-hit play, which is the correct operating method. This normal right-hit instruction effect is executed regardless of whether the player is playing with right-hit play, which is the correct operating method, or whether the player is playing with left-hit play, which is the incorrect operating method.

(Abnormal operation method instruction performance)
In this embodiment, when the game is controlled to a game state where a specific operation method is required, an abnormal operation instruction effect can be executed to instruct the player to play using the correct operation method. This abnormal operation instruction effect is executed when a predetermined condition (see FIG. 8-10(A)) is met due to the player playing using an incorrect operation method.

In this embodiment, when the machine is controlled in normal mode (left-hand mode) in which the machine should be played with a left-handed hit, if a player plays with a right-handed hit, which is an incorrect operating method, and a predetermined condition is met (for example, a signal indicating the game ball passing is detected five times in succession from the gate switch), an abnormal left-hand hit instruction effect can be executed, instructing the player to play with a left-handed hit, which is the correct operating method. This abnormal left-hand hit instruction effect is not executed when the player is playing with a left-handed hit, which is the correct operating method.

In addition, when the machine is controlled to right-hand mode, which requires right-hand play, if a player incorrectly plays with the left hand and a predetermined condition is met (for example, the game ball entering the machine is detected from the first start port switch), an abnormal right-hand play instruction effect can be executed, instructing the player to play with the correct right-hand play method. This abnormal right-hand play instruction effect is not executed when the player is playing with the correct right-hand play method.

[Operation Instructions List Table]
FIG. 8-8(A) is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of an operation method instruction effect list table in this embodiment. FIG. 8-8(A) includes an "operation method instruction effect" indicating the name and type of each operation method instruction effect, an "execution timing" indicating the timing at which each operation method instruction effect is executed, a "performance device" indicating the performance device used in each operation method instruction effect, an "execution content example" indicating an example of the performance content of each operation method instruction effect, and an "effect execution period" indicating the period during which each operation method instruction effect is executed. Note that effects and modes not described in detail in the explanation of FIG. 8-8(A) will be discussed later.

As shown in Figure 8-8 (A), when the operation method instruction effect is the "first operation method instruction effect," it is a "normal right-hit instruction" among the "normal operation method instructions," the execution timing is "at the start of the jackpot," the effect devices are the "image display device 5" and "speakers 8L, 8R," and example effect content is that the "first instruction image" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the "first instruction sound (hit left)" is played and output from speakers 8L, 8R, and the effect execution period is "1500 ms" or "3000 ms." In this example, the effect execution period for the first operation method instruction effect differs depending on the type of jackpot (see Figures 8-54, 8-55, and 8-56).

Furthermore, when the operation method instruction effect is a "second operation method instruction effect," it is a "normal right hit instruction" among the "normal operation method instructions," the execution timing is "when the time-saving feature starts," the effect devices are the "image display device 5" and the "speakers 8L, 8R," and an example of the effect content is that a "second instruction image" is displayed on the image display device 5 and a "second instruction sound (hit right)" is played and output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the effect execution period is "3000 ms."

Furthermore, when the operation method instruction effect is a "third operation method instruction effect," it is a "normal left-hit instruction" among the "normal operation method instructions," the execution timing is "when time-saving control ends," the effect devices are the "image display device 5" and "speakers 8L, 8R," an example of the effect content is that a "third instruction image" is displayed on the image display device 5, and a "third instruction sound (hit left)" is played and output from speakers 8L, 8R, and the effect execution period is "5000 ms." Specifically, "when time-saving control ends," which is the execution timing of this third operation method instruction effect, is the timing when control of right-hit mode (time-saving state, ST state) ends and control of left-hit mode (normal state) begins.

Furthermore, when the operation method instruction effect is the "fourth operation method instruction effect," it is an "abnormal right-hit instruction" among the "abnormal operation method instructions," the execution timing is "when an abnormal left-hit is detected during right-hit mode," the effect devices are the "image display device 5" and "speakers 8L, 8R," an example of the effect content is that the "fourth instruction image" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the "fourth instruction sound (hit right)" is played and output from speakers 8L, 8R, and the effect execution period is "5000 ms." The execution timing of this fourth operation method instruction effect, "when an abnormal left-hit is detected during right-hit mode," is specifically the timing when the abnormal left-hit detection condition (see Figure 8-10 (A)) is met when the machine is controlled to right-hit mode (time-saving state, ST state).

Furthermore, when the operation method instruction effect is the "5th operation method instruction effect," it is an "abnormal left hit instruction" among the "abnormal operation method instructions," the execution timing is "when an abnormal right hit is detected during left hit mode," the effect devices are the "image display device 5" and "speakers 8L, 8R," and an example of the effect content is that the "5th instruction image" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the "5th instruction sound (hit left)" is played and output from speakers 8L, 8R.

In this embodiment, the fifth operation method instruction effect includes a fifth operation method instruction effect (LV1: short) and a fifth operation method instruction effect (LV2: long). The fifth operation method instruction effect (LV1: short) is executed when the abnormal right-hit detection condition (LV1: short) (see FIG. 8-10(A)) is met, and the fifth operation method instruction effect (LV2: long) is executed when the abnormal right-hit detection condition (LV2: long) (see FIG. 8-10(A)) is met. Hereinafter, the fifth operation method instruction effect (LV1: short) will be referred to as the "fifth operation method instruction effect (LV1)" or "fifth operation method instruction effect (short)" as appropriate, and the fifth operation method instruction effect (LV2: long) will be referred to as the "fifth operation method instruction effect (LV2)" or "fifth operation method instruction effect (long)" as appropriate.

When the operation method instruction effect is the "Fifth operation method instruction effect (LV1)," the effect execution period is "5000 ms," and when the operation method instruction effect is the "Fifth operation method instruction effect (LV2)," the effect execution period is "10000 ms." In this way, because the effect execution period for the fifth operation method instruction effect (LV2) is longer than the effect execution period for the fifth operation method instruction effect (LV1), the fifth operation method instruction effect (LV2) is emphasized more than the fifth operation method instruction effect (LV1).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the fifth operation method instruction performance (LV1) and the fifth operation method instruction performance (LV2) have different performance execution periods, but this is not limited to such an example, and elements other than the performance execution period may be different between the fifth operation method instruction performance (LV1) and the fifth operation method instruction performance (LV2).

For example, in the fifth operation method instruction performance (LV1), a "5A instruction image" is displayed on the image display device 5 and a "5A instruction sound" is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R, and in the fifth operation method instruction performance (LV2), a "5B instruction image" is displayed on the image display device 5 and a "5B instruction sound" is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this case, the 5B instruction image may be an image that is more emphasized than the 5A instruction image. Examples of an emphasized image include a "larger display area" and "more display colors used." The 5B instruction sound may also be a sound that is more emphasized than the 5A instruction sound. Examples of an emphasized sound include a "louder sound volume," "more characters in the sound," and "higher sound key."

[Error notification effect]
In this embodiment, when an error occurs, an error notification effect can be executed to notify the user that an error has occurred. Depending on the type of error, the error notification effect can be a first error notification effect, a second error notification effect, a third error notification effect, or a fourth error notification effect. Hereinafter, the error notification effect will be referred to as an "error notification" as appropriate.

(First error notification effect)
In this embodiment, when a ball-out error occurs, a first error notification effect (ball-out error notification) can be executed to notify the player that a ball-out error has occurred. This first error notification effect is executed when a first error detection condition (see FIG. 8-10(B)) is met (when a ball-out error is detected).

(Second error notification effect)
In this embodiment, when a full-tank error occurs based on the upper tray of the pachinko gaming machine 1 being filled with game balls, it is possible to execute a second error notification effect (full-tank error notification) that notifies the player that a full-tank error has occurred. This second error notification effect is an effect that is executed when a second error detection condition (see FIG. 8-10(B)) is established (a full-tank error is detected).

(Third error notification effect)
In this embodiment, when a door open error occurs, a third error notification effect (door open error notification) can be executed to notify the player that a door open error has occurred. This third error notification effect is executed when a third error detection condition (see FIG. 8-10(B)) is met (a door open error is detected).

(Fourth error notification effect)
In this embodiment, when a magnetic error occurs, a fourth error notification effect (magnetic error notification) can be executed to notify the player that a magnetic error has occurred. This fourth error notification effect is executed when a fourth error detection condition (see FIG. 8-10(B)) is met (a magnetic error is detected).

[Operation Instructions List Table]
FIG. 8-8(B) is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of an error notification effect list table in this embodiment. FIG. 8-8(B) includes an "error notification effect" indicating the name and type of each error notification effect, an "execution timing" indicating the timing at which each error notification effect is executed, a "performance device" indicating the performance device used in each error notification effect, an "execution content example" indicating an example of the performance content of each error notification effect, and a "performance execution period" indicating the period during which each error notification effect is executed. Note that effects and modes not described in detail in the explanation of FIG. 8-8(B) will be discussed later.

As shown in Figure 8-8 (B), when the error notification effect is a "first error notification effect," it is a "ball out error notification" among the "error notifications," the execution timing is "when a ball out error is detected," the effect devices are the "image display device 5" and the "game effect lamp 9," and an example of the effect content is that the "first error image" (an image containing the words "ball out error") is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in "blinking red," and the effect execution period is "until the error is resolved."

Furthermore, when the error notification effect is a "second error notification effect," it is a "full tank error notification" among the "error notifications," the execution timing is "when a full tank error is detected," the effect devices are the "image display device 5" and the "game effect lamp 9," and an example of the effect content is that a "second error image" (an image containing the words "full tank error") is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a "flashing red" light, and the effect execution period is "until the error is resolved."

Furthermore, if the error notification effect is a "third error notification effect," it is a "door open error notification" among the "error notifications," the execution timing is "when a door open error is detected," the effect devices are the "image display device 5" and the "game effect lamp 9," and an example of the effect content is that the "third error image" (an image containing the words "door open error") is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a "flashing red" light, and the effect execution period is "until the error is resolved."

Furthermore, when the error notification effect is the "fourth error notification effect," it is a "magnetic error notification" among the "error notifications," the execution timing is "when a magnetic error is detected," the effect devices are the "image display device 5" and the "game effect lamp 9," and example effect contents are that the "fourth error image" (an image containing the words "magnetic error") is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a "flashing red" light, and the effect execution period is "until the error is resolved."

In this way, operation instructions are presented using the image display device 5 and speakers 8L, 8R, and can instruct the player on operation methods by appealing to their senses of sight and hearing. On the other hand, error notifications are presented using the image display device 5 and game effect lamp 9, and can notify the player that an error has occurred by appealing to their sense of sight.

[Abnormal operation method instruction effect determination process]
8-9 is a flowchart showing the abnormal operation method instruction effect determination process executed when waiting for the start of fluctuation, at the start of fluctuation, during fluctuation, at the end of fluctuation, during a jackpot, etc. The effect control CPU 120 executes the abnormal operation method instruction effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-9 in the variable display start waiting process (step S170), variable display start setting process (step S171), variable display effect process (step S172), jackpot effect process (step S176), ending process (step S177), etc. of the effect control process shown in FIG.

First, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the game mode is normal mode (step S02TM1010). If the game mode is not normal mode (step S02TM1010: NO), the presentation control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM1200.

If the game mode is normal mode (step S02TM1010: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the second abnormal left-hit instruction flag (described below) is set (step S02TM1020). If the second abnormal left-hit instruction flag is set (step S02TM1020: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM1200.

If the second abnormal left-hit instruction flag is not set (step S02TM1020: NO), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the abnormal right-hit detection condition (LV2) is met (step S02TM1030).

In this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether the abnormal right-hit detection condition (LV2) is met based on a condition table (see Figure 8-10 (A)) related to the abnormal operation method instruction described below, and sends a performance command including the determination result to the performance control CPU 120, allowing the performance control CPU 120 to grasp the determination result.

If the abnormal right-hit detection condition (LV2) is not met (step S02TM1030: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM1080.

If the abnormal right-hit detection condition (LV2) is met (step S02TM1030: YES), the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV2) (step S02TM1040) and sets the second abnormal left-hit instruction flag (step S02TM1050).

In this embodiment, the second abnormal left-hit instruction flag is a type of effect flag that is set when it is determined that the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV2) will be executed. When the second abnormal left-hit instruction flag is set, it becomes possible to determine that the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV2) has already been executed in the abnormal operation method instruction effect determination process and the jackpot start effect end determination process described below. This second abnormal left-hit instruction flag is cleared when the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV2) that was the target when the second abnormal left-hit instruction flag was set ends.

After step S02TM1050, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the first abnormal left-hit instruction flag, described below, is set (S02TM1060). If the first abnormal left-hit instruction flag is not set (S02TM1060: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM1210.

If the first abnormal left-hit instruction flag is set (S02TM1060: YES), the performance control CPU 120 clears the first abnormal left-hit instruction flag (step S02TM1070) and proceeds to step S02TM1210.

If step S02TM1030: NO, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the first abnormal left-hit instruction flag is set (S02TM1080). If the first abnormal left-hit instruction flag is set (S02TM1080: YES), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM1210.

If the first abnormal left-hit instruction flag is not set (S02TM1080: NO), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the abnormal right-hit detection condition (LV1) is met based on the condition table related to the abnormal operation method instruction (see Figure 8-10 (A)) (step S02TM1090).

In this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether the abnormal right-hit detection condition (LV1) is met based on the condition table related to the abnormal operation method instruction (see Figure 8-10 (A)), and sends a performance command including the determination result to the performance control CPU 120, allowing the performance control CPU 120 to grasp the determination result.

If the abnormal right-hit detection condition (LV1) is not met (step S02TM1090: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM1210.

If the abnormal right-hit detection condition (LV1) is met (step S02TM1090: YES), the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV1) (step S02TM1100), sets the first abnormal left-hit instruction flag (step S02TM1110), and proceeds to step S02TM1210.

In this embodiment, the first abnormal left-hit instruction flag is a type of effect flag that is set when it is determined that the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV1) will be executed. When the first abnormal left-hit instruction flag is set, it becomes possible to determine that the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV1) has already been executed in the abnormal operation method instruction effect determination process and the jackpot start effect end determination process described below. This first abnormal left-hit instruction flag is cleared when the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV2) that was the target when the first abnormal left-hit instruction flag was set ends, or when the second abnormal left-hit instruction flag is set.

Next, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the game mode is right-hit mode (step S02TM1210). That is, it determines whether the game mode is controlled to jackpot mode, time-saving mode, or ST mode. If the game mode is not right-hit mode (step S02TM1210: NO), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the game mode is right-hit mode (step S02TM1210: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the abnormal right-hit instruction flag described below is set (step S02TM1220). If the abnormal right-hit instruction flag is set (step S02TM1220: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the abnormal right-hit instruction flag is not set (step S02TM1220: NO), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the abnormal left-hit detection condition is met based on the condition table related to the abnormal operation method instruction (see Figure 8-10 (A)) (step S02TM1230).

In this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether the abnormal left-hit detection condition is met based on a condition table related to abnormal operation method instructions (see Figure 8-10 (A)), and sends a performance command including the determination result to the performance control CPU 120, allowing the performance control CPU 120 to grasp the determination result.

If the abnormal left-hit detection condition is not met (step S02TM1230: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the processing.

If the abnormal left-hit detection condition is met (step S02TM1230: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the abnormal operation method instruction effect determination process is being executed during the jackpot fanfare period (hereinafter referred to as the "jackpot FF period") (S02TM1240). If the abnormal operation method instruction effect determination process is being executed during the jackpot FF period (S02TM1240: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the abnormal operation method instruction effect determination process is not executed during the jackpot FF period (S02TM1240: NO), the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the abnormal right-hit instruction effect (step S02TM1250), sets the abnormal right-hit instruction flag (S02TM1260), and ends the process.

In this embodiment, the abnormal right hit instruction flag is a type of effect flag that is set when it is determined that an abnormal right hit instruction effect will be executed. When the abnormal right hit instruction flag is set, it becomes possible to determine that an abnormal right hit instruction effect has already been executed in the abnormal operation method instruction effect determination process and the jackpot start effect end determination process described below. This abnormal right hit instruction flag is cleared when the abnormal right hit instruction effect that was the target when the abnormal right hit instruction flag was set ends.

[Tables referenced in the abnormal operation method instruction performance determination process]
<Condition table related to abnormal operation method instructions>
8-10(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a condition table related to abnormal operation instructions. As shown in FIG. 8-10(A), in this embodiment, conditions are set corresponding to each abnormal operation instruction performance.

(Abnormal left-hand hit detection conditions)
An abnormal left-hit detection condition is defined as a condition corresponding to an abnormal right-hit instruction. Specifically, the abnormal left-hit detection condition is defined as "detecting a signal from the first start port switch in right-hit mode."

For example, this abnormal left-hit detection condition is met when a player plays with their left hand during time-saving mode and the game ball enters the first start winning slot, when a player plays with their left hand during ST mode and the game ball enters the first start winning slot, or when a player plays with their left hand during jackpot mode and the game ball enters the first start winning slot.

(Abnormal right hit detection condition LV1: Short)
An abnormal right-hit detection condition (LV1: short) is defined as a condition corresponding to an abnormal left-hit instruction. Specifically, the abnormal right-hit detection condition (LV1: short) is defined as "detecting a signal from the gate switch five times in succession in normal mode (left-hit mode)."

For example, if a player plays with a right-handed hit during normal mode, causing five game balls to pass through the passage gate 41 in a row, this abnormal right-handed hit detection condition (LV1: short) will be met. Note that in this embodiment, "consecutively" when five game balls pass through the passage gate 41 in a row is assumed to occur within 1.5 seconds, but this is not limited to this, and may be within a time shorter than 1.5 seconds or within a time longer than 1.5 seconds.

(Abnormal right hit detection condition LV2: Long)
An abnormal right-hit detection condition (LV2: Long) is defined as a condition corresponding to an abnormal left-hit instruction. Specifically, the abnormal right-hit detection condition (LV2: Long) is defined as "detecting a signal from the gate switch six or more times in succession in normal mode (left-hit mode)" or "detecting a signal from the second start port switch in normal mode."

For example, this abnormal right-hand hit detection condition (LV2: Long) is met when a player plays with a right-hand hit during normal mode, causing six or more game balls to pass through the passage gate 41 in succession, or when a player plays with a right-hand hit during normal mode, causing a game ball to enter the second start winning slot.

<Condition table related to error notification>
8-10(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a condition table related to error notification. As shown in FIG. 8-10(B), in this embodiment, a condition and a presentation flag that are set when the condition is met are set for each error notification presentation.

(First Error Detection Condition)
A first error detection condition is defined as a condition corresponding to the first error notification (out-of-ball error notification). Specifically, a "out-of-ball error detection" is defined as the first error detection condition, and a "first error designation flag" is defined as an effect flag that is set when this condition is met.

(Second Error Detection Condition)
A second error detection condition is defined as a condition corresponding to the second error notification (full tank error notification). Specifically, a "full tank error detection" is defined as the second error detection condition, and a "second error designation flag" is defined as an effect flag that is set when this condition is met.

(Third Error Detection Condition)
A third error detection condition is defined as a condition corresponding to the third error notification (door open error notification). Specifically, a "door open error detection" is defined as the third error detection condition, and a "third error designation flag" is defined as an effect flag that is set when this condition is met.

(Fourth Error Detection Condition)
A fourth error detection condition is defined as a condition corresponding to the fourth error notification (magnetic error notification). Specifically, a "magnetic error detection" is defined as the fourth error detection condition, and a "fourth error designation flag" is defined as an effect flag that is set when this condition is met.

[Jackpot start effect end determination process]
8-11 is a flowchart showing the process for determining whether or not the effect has ended at the start of a jackpot, which is executed when the jackpot starts. The effect control CPU 120 executes the process for determining whether or not the effect has ended at the start of a jackpot, which is shown in FIG. 8-11, in the jackpot effect processing (step S176) of the effect control process shown in FIG.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the abnormal left-hit instruction flag is set (S02TM2010). That is, it determines whether either the first abnormal left-hit instruction flag or the second abnormal left-hit instruction flag is set. If the abnormal left-hit instruction flag is not set (S02TM2010: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM2030.

If the abnormal left-hit instruction flag is set (S02TM2010: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the abnormal left-hit instruction effect that is currently being executed (step S02TM2020) and proceeds to step S02TM2030.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the abnormal right-hit instruction flag is set (S02TM2030). If the abnormal right-hit instruction flag is not set (S02TM2030: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the abnormal right-hit instruction flag is set (S02TM2030: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the abnormal right-hit instruction effect that is currently being executed (step S02TM2040) and ends processing.

In this way, during the jackpot start effect determination process, which is executed when the jackpot FF effect starts, processing is executed to terminate abnormal operation method instructions (abnormal left hit instruction, abnormal right hit instruction), so when the jackpot FF effect is executed, the abnormal operation method instructions (abnormal left hit instruction, abnormal right hit instruction) that had been executed up until then are terminated.

On the other hand, the jackpot start effect determination process, which is executed when the jackpot FF effect starts, does not execute processes to terminate error notifications or the volume adjustment effect, light intensity adjustment effect, and auto button setting effect, which will be described later. Therefore, even if the jackpot FF effect is executed, any error notifications that have been executed up until that point, or the volume adjustment effect, light intensity adjustment effect, and auto button setting effect, which will be described later, will continue to be executed without terminating.

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described. In this example, the game mode when the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state) is set to [normal mode], the game mode when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) and the number of times this time-saving state is controlled is set to [time-saving mode], the game mode when the game state is controlled to the probability variable state (high probability/high base state) and the number of times this probability variable state is controlled is set to [ST mode], and the game mode when the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state is set to [jackpot mode].

In this embodiment, "Normal Mode" is a game mode played primarily by hitting the reels with the left hand, and is therefore referred to as "Left-Hit Mode" where appropriate, while "Time-Saving Mode," "ST Mode," and "Jackpot Mode" are game modes played primarily by hitting the reels with the right hand, and are therefore referred to as "Right-Hit Mode" where appropriate.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot occurs and the gaming ball enters the probability variable area, (1) time-saving control is performed a specified number of times, and (2) the probability variable control is performed a specified number of times. This gaming state is referred to as the "probability variable state." Hereinafter, this will be referred to as the "ST state" or "ST" as appropriate.

In the example of the game flow shown in Figure 8-12, (1) when the game mode is [normal mode], (2) a jackpot (initial jackpot) occurs, and after the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and then transitions to (3) [time-saving mode] (chance time) (time-saving 100 spins) or (4) [ST mode] (powerful rush) (ST 154 spins), and when controlled in these game modes, if (5) a jackpot occurs, the game transitions to (4) [ST mode] (powerful rush) (ST 154 spins), and if a jackpot does not occur, the game transitions to (1) [normal mode].
Below, we will explain the game modes (1) to (5) in the game flow.

(1) When the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the game mode is set to [normal mode].

(2) In the state described in (1) above, when a variable display is executed that results in a "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, the jackpot types for the first special symbol are "jackpot A" and "jackpot B." As an example of a presentation when the jackpot type is "jackpot A" or "jackpot B," the word "BONUS" is displayed on the image display device 5 to indicate that a "3R jackpot" or "10R jackpot" has occurred.

In this example, during the jackpot round (1R-3R) of (2), a presentation is executed to notify the player of the type of jackpot that the jackpot occurred in (for example, a presentation informing the player of whether or not an icon displaying the words "Powerful Rush" can be obtained), and to notify the player of the game mode that the game will be controlled to after the jackpot game state ends.

(3) When the jackpot ends in the case where the jackpot type in (2) above is "Jackpot A," the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game state to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and sets the game mode to "time-saving mode" (chance time) when 100 variable displays are executed. As an example of presentation when the game mode is "time-saving mode," the words "chance time" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the game mode will transition to "time-saving mode."

In state (3), when all display results are "misses" and 100 variable displays are executed in the time-saving state, the system will be controlled to state (1).

(4) When the jackpot ends in the case where the jackpot type in (2) above is "Jackpot B," the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game state to a probability variable state (high probability/high base state), and sets the game mode to [ST mode] (Powerful Rush) when 154 variable displays are executed. As an example of presentation when the game mode is [ST mode], the words "Powerful Rush" are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the game mode will transition to [ST mode].

In this embodiment, when the game mode is [ST mode], three presentation modes with different presentation characteristics are set in ST mode, and the player can select from these presentation modes at will. Below, when the game mode is [ST mode] and the presentation mode is set to one of the presentation modes, it will be referred to as "ST mode [presentation mode name]" as appropriate.

In this example, three presentation modes are set within the ST mode: [Dream Dream Mode], [Nana Mode], and [Jam Mode].
[Dream Dream Mode] is a presentation mode in which character A mainly appears in reach effects, etc., [Nana Mode] is a presentation mode in which character B mainly appears in reach effects, etc., and [Dream Dream Mode] is a presentation mode in which character C mainly appears in reach effects, etc. Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and the background image and the interface of the corresponding display (active display, pending display) may be different depending on the presentation mode.

In this example, as a method for selecting the ST mode presentation mode, when control is established from "Jackpot B" to ST mode, it is possible to select the presentation mode within that jackpot game (see Figure 8-60 (B)), and when control is established from "Jackpot C" to ST mode, it is possible to select the presentation mode within that jackpot game (not shown).

In state (4), if 154 variable displays are executed in the variable state, where all display results are "misses," the system will be controlled to state (1).

(5) When the game mode is "Time-saving mode" (see (3)) or "ST mode" (see (4)), if the display result of any of the variable displays becomes "Jack Hit," the game is controlled to a Jackpot game state. In this embodiment, when the display result becomes "Jack Hit," the jackpot type of the second special symbol is "Jack Hit C."

(5) As an example of a presentation when the jackpot type is "Jackpot C," the words "Yume Yume Bonus" are displayed on the image display device 5 to indicate that it is a "10R jackpot."

[Decorative designs, small designs]
In this embodiment, in response to the start of the display of the special pattern changes, the CPU 120 for performance control starts the display of the decorative pattern changes in the central area of the screen (hereinafter referred to as the "pattern display area" as appropriate), and starts the display of the small pattern changes in the upper left area of the screen (hereinafter referred to as the "small pattern display area" as appropriate).

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols has finished and the display result has been derived and displayed, the combination of decorative symbols that will result in the display is fixed and stopped in the symbol display area, and the combination of small symbols that will result in the display is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display area.

[Layer structure]
Fig. 8-13(A) is a conceptual diagram that schematically shows the layer structure of various images in the image display device 5, and Fig. 8-13(B) is an explanatory diagram of the layer structure of various images in the image display device 5. In this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 8-13(A) and (B), the layer structure is composed of four types of layers: a first layer, a second layer, a third layer, and a fourth layer.

As shown in Figure 8-13 (A), the first layer is displayed in the foreground layer, the second layer is displayed in the layer one layer behind the first layer, the third layer is displayed one layer behind the second layer, and the fourth layer is displayed one layer behind the third layer, i.e., the background layer. Therefore, in terms of layer display priority, the first layer has the highest display priority, followed by the second layer, the third layer, and then the fourth layer, with the fourth layer having the lowest display priority. In other words, the display priority is highest in the order of fourth layer < third layer < second layer < first layer. Note that information displayed in a designated display area of a layer with a high display priority has higher visibility (appears to be displayed in front when viewed from the player) than information displayed in a designated display area of a layer with a low display priority.

Also, as shown in Figure 8-13 (B), the first layer displays small symbols and the like. The second layer displays error notification images (first error image, second error image, third error image, fourth error image) related to error notifications. The third layer displays instruction images (first instruction image, second instruction image, third instruction image, fourth instruction image) related to operation method instructions and the system right-hit image described below. The fourth layer displays decorative symbols, background images, characters, corresponding displays (active display, pending display), and the like.

In the following description, when a predetermined image is placed on the nth layer, the predetermined image may be referred to as the "predetermined image [nth layer]." For example, when a decorative pattern as the predetermined image is placed on the fourth layer, the decorative pattern will be referred to as the "decorative pattern [fourth layer]."

It is also possible to provide a layer structure with different display priorities for specific layers. For example, as mentioned above, decorative designs, background images, corresponding displays (hold displays, active displays), characters, etc. can be placed on the fourth layer. Here, the fourth layer may be composed of a 4-1 layer, a 4-2 layer, and a 4-3 layer, with corresponding displays placed on the 4-1 layer, decorative designs and characters placed on the 4-2 layer, and a background image placed on the 4-3 layer. In this case, the display priorities are highest on the 4-3 layer < the 4-2 layer < the 4-1 layer.

[Normal mode: Example of abnormal left-hand hit instruction]
Figure 8-14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images and effect sounds of each effect related to the abnormal left hit instruction (LV1, LV2) during normal mode. Figure 8-15 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the abnormal left hit instruction (LV1) among the abnormal left hit instructions during normal mode. Figure 8-16 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the abnormal left hit instruction (LV2) among the abnormal left hit instructions during normal mode. "T" in the figure indicates timing.

In the diagram of [Feature 02TM], for the sake of convenience in explaining the effect examples, the sound effects played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R and the light effects from the game effect lamp 9 are shown near (to the right, etc.) the image display device 5. The actual positional relationship between each device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp 9) is as shown in Figure 8-1.

Furthermore, in the diagram in [Feature Section 02TM], in order to clearly show the features of the effect example, the effect sounds played back and output from speakers 8L, 8R near the image display device 5 are shown; however, the effect sounds shown here are only a portion of the effect sounds actually played back and output from speakers 8L, 8R, and other effect sounds may also be played back and output. For example, even if at least two or more types of effect sounds (music, dialogue sounds, message sounds (instruction sounds), sound effects) are being played back and output from speakers 8L, 8R, if it is desired to clearly show that instruction sounds are being played back and output, only the instruction sounds being played back and output from speakers 8L, 8R may be shown. The same applies to the effect light of the game effect lamp 9.

Furthermore, when the illustration shows a case where two or more types of effect sounds are being played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R, the effect sounds described with only the word "effect sound" are played back and output with a higher playback output priority than the effect sounds described with the word "(effect sound)" in parentheses.

In this embodiment, the following method is used to reproduce and output effect sounds in a state where the reproduction output priority is high.
The channel setting ratio, which is the volume value specified for the channel assigned to each effect sound, can be set between maximum volume "1," which is 100% of the reference output volume, and all muted "0," which is 0%. By setting the channel setting ratio of an effect sound that is desired to be played back and output in a state with a high playback output priority to "1," and setting the channel setting ratio of an effect sound that is desired to be played back and output in a state with a low playback output priority to a value lower than "1" (for example, "0.3"), the playback output priorities can be made different.
These are similarly applicable to the following figures, and therefore will not be described below.

(Example of abnormal left-handed hit instruction (LV1))
First, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 8-15: T1), the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, an active display (in this example, a round object) is displayed in the active display area at the bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs normal mode performance sounds associated with normal mode from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-14 (2), when the CPU 103 detects an abnormal right-hand hit (LV1) (Figure 8-15: T2), the effect control CPU 120 executes an abnormal left-hand hit instruction effect (LV1), displays a fifth instruction image IP5 (in this example, an image including a left-pointing arrow object and the words "left-hand hit") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and plays and outputs a fifth instruction sound (in this example, the sound "Hit left") from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, although the normal mode effect sound is being played and output from speakers 8L and 8R, the playback output priority is normal mode effect sound < fifth instruction sound.

In this example, when the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV1) is executed, the image of the fifth instruction image IP5, which includes a left-pointing arrow object and the words "left-hit," is an image that is controlled to frame in from the right edge of the screen of the image display device 5 and frame out toward the left edge of the screen. During the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV1), this display control is repeated twice (5000 ms).

Next, as shown in Figure 8-14 (3), when 5000 ms have passed since the start of the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV1) (Figure 8-15: T3), the effect control CPU 120 ends the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV1), erases the fifth instruction image IP5 (in this example, an image including a left-pointing arrow object and the words "Hit left") from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and ends the playback output of the fifth instruction sound (in this example, the sound "Hit left") from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the normal mode effect sound is being played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(Example of abnormal left-handed hit instruction (LV2))
First, as shown in Figure 8-14 (1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol (Figure 8-16: T1), the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display is displayed in the active display area.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs normal mode performance sounds associated with normal mode from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-14 (2), when the CPU 103 detects an abnormal right-hand hit (LV2) (Figure 8-16: T2), the effect control CPU 120 executes an abnormal left-hand hit instruction effect (LV2), displays a fifth instruction image IP5 (in this example, an image including a left-pointing arrow object and the words "left-hand hit") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and plays and outputs a fifth instruction sound (in this example, the sound "Hit left") from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, although the normal mode effect sound is being played and output from speakers 8L and 8R, the playback output priority is normal mode effect sound < fifth instruction sound.

In this example, when the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV2) is executed, the image of the fifth instruction image IP5, which includes a left-pointing arrow object and the words "left-hit," is an image that is controlled to frame in from the right edge of the screen of the image display device 5 and frame out toward the left edge of the screen. During the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV2), this display control is repeated four times (10,000 ms).

Next, as shown in Figure 8-14 (3), when 10,000 ms have passed since the start of the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV2) (Figure 8-16: T3), the effect control CPU 120 ends the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV2), erases the fifth instruction image IP5 (in this example, an image including a left-pointing arrow object and the words "Hit left") from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and ends the playback output of the fifth instruction sound (in this example, the sound "Hit left") from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the normal mode effect sound is being played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

[Normal mode: Error notification example]
8-17 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image and effect light of each effect related to the error notification in the normal mode. FIG. 8-18 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the error notification in the normal mode.

First, as shown in Figure 8-17 (1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol (Figure 8-18: T1), the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol begins in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display is displayed in the active display area.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs normal mode performance sounds associated with normal mode from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-17 (2), when the CPU 103 detects a ball-out error (Figure 8-18: T2), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a ball-out error notification presentation, displays a first error image EP1 (in this example, an image containing the words "ball-out error") in the error image display area (top right of the screen) of the image display device 5, and causes the game effect lamp 9 to flash red. At this time, the normal mode presentation sound continues to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-17 (3), when the out-of-ball error is resolved and detection of the out-of-ball error ends (Figure 8-18: T3), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the out-of-ball error notification presentation, erases the first error image EP1 from the error image display area of the image display device 5, and ends the red flashing of the game effect lamp 9. At this time, the normal mode presentation sound continues to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

[Normal mode: Abnormal left-hand hit instruction → Right-hand hit mode: Big hit FF effect]
Figure 8-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images, sound effects, and light effects of each effect associated with the start of a jackpot fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) when an abnormal left-hit instruction initiated during normal mode is executed and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Figure 8-20 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect associated with the start of a jackpot fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) when an abnormal left-hit instruction initiated during normal mode is executed and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The jackpot FF effect will be described in detail in Figures 8-54 and 8-52, which will be described later.

First, as shown in Figure 8-19 (1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol (Figure 8-20: T1), the performance control CPU 120 causes a static display (stops swinging) of a decorative symbol combination (in this example, "333") indicating that the display result will be a "jackpot" in the symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, an active display is displayed in the active display area.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs normal mode performance sounds associated with normal mode from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-19 (2), when the CPU 103 detects an abnormal right hit (LV1) (Figure 8-20: T2), the effect control CPU 120 executes an abnormal left hit instruction effect (LV1), displays the fifth instruction image IP5 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and plays and outputs the fifth instruction sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, although the normal mode effect sound is being played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the playback output priority is normal mode effect sound < fifth instruction sound.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-19 (3), if the CPU 103 controls the game state to a jackpot game state before 5000 ms have elapsed since the start of the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV1) (Figure 8-20: T3), the effect control CPU 120 will start the jackpot FF effect, cause the image display device 5 to display the first jackpot type notification image BP1 (in this example, an image including a convergent line and the word "BONUS"), play and output a jackpot FF effect sound (fanfare effect sound) from speakers 8L and 8R, and cause the game effect lamp 9 to emit rainbow colors.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV1), erases the fifth instruction image from the image display device 5, and ends the playback output of the fifth instruction sound from speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the right-hit mode, it displays a system right-hit image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage playing with a right-hit. In the following effect examples, explanation of the system right-hit image will be omitted.

In this embodiment, this system right-hit image is an image that encourages right-hit play and is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 when the device is controlled in right-hit mode (jackpot mode, time-saving mode, ST mode), and is a different image from the instruction images related to normal right-hit instructions and abnormal right-hit instructions, which are only displayed at specific times.

In jackpot mode, the system right-hit image begins to display when the presentation control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start command, which is a type of presentation command indicating that control of the jackpot game state has begun, and ends to display when the presentation control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end command, which is a type of presentation command indicating that control of the jackpot game state has ended.

Similarly, for the system right-hit image in time-saving mode and ST mode, the display will start/end based on the reception of a time-saving start command, which is a type of presentation command indicating that control of time-saving mode will begin; a time-saving end command, which is a type of presentation command indicating that control of time-saving mode will end; an ST start command, which is a type of presentation command indicating that control of ST mode will begin; and an ST end command, which is a type of presentation command indicating that control of ST mode will end.

In this example, when the abnormal left-hit instruction display (LV1) is being executed, a jackpot FF display is executed and the abnormal left-hit instruction display (LV1) ends. However, the same applies to the abnormal left-hit instruction (LV2), so a description will be omitted.

[Normal mode: Error notification → Right-hand mode: Big hit FF effect]
Fig. 8-21 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images, sound effects, and light effects of each effect related to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state and a jackpot fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) is started when an error notification started during normal mode is being executed. Fig. 8-22 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state and a jackpot fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) is started when an error notification started during normal mode is being executed.

First, as shown in Figure 8-21 (1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol (Figure 8-22: T1), the performance control CPU 120 causes a static display (stops swinging) of a decorative symbol combination (in this example, "333") indicating a "jackpot" display result in the symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, a variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, an active display is displayed in the active display area.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs normal mode performance sounds associated with normal mode from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-21 (2), when the CPU 103 detects a ball-out error (Figure 8-22: T2), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a ball-out error notification presentation, displays a first error image EP1 (in this example, an image containing the words "ball-out error") in the error image display area (top right of the screen) of the image display device 5, and causes the game effect lamp 9 to flash red. At this time, the normal mode presentation sound continues to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-21 (3), if the CPU 103 controls the game state to a jackpot game state before the out-of-ball error notification effect starts and the error is resolved (Figure 8-22: T3), the effect control CPU 120 will start the jackpot FF effect, display the first jackpot type notification image BP1 (in this example, an image including a convergent line and the word "BONUS") on the image display device 5, and play and output the jackpot FF effect sound (fanfare effect sound) from speakers 8L and 8R.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the out-of-ball error notification effect, and continues to display the first error image EP1 (in this example, an image containing the words "out-of-ball error") in the error image display area of the image display device 5. Furthermore, normally, this would be the time for the game effect lamp 9 to emit a rainbow of colors corresponding to the jackpot FF effect, but in this embodiment, because the error notification has a higher execution priority than the jackpot FF effect, the game effect lamp 9 continues to flash red.

Then, when the out-of-ball error is resolved (Figure 8-22: T4), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the out-of-ball error notification presentation, erases the first error image EP1 (in this example, an image containing the words "out-of-ball error") from the error image display area of the image display device 5, and changes the game effect lamp 9 from flashing red to emitting rainbow colors corresponding to the jackpot FF presentation (not shown).

[Normal mode: Abnormal left-hand hit instruction, error notification → Right-hand hit mode: Big hit FF effect]
Figure 8-23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images, effect sounds, and effect lights of each effect related to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state and a jackpot FF effect is started when an abnormal left-hit instruction and error notification started during normal mode are being executed. Figure 8-24 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state and a jackpot FF effect is started when an abnormal left-hit instruction and error notification started during normal mode are being executed.

First, the presentation examples shown in Figures 8-23 (1) and (2) are similar to the presentation examples shown in Figures 8-19 (1) and (2), so explanations will be omitted.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-23 (3), when the CPU 103 detects a ball-out error (Figure 8-24: T3), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a ball-out error notification presentation, displays the first error image EP1 (in this example, an image containing the words "ball-out error") in the error image display area of the image display device 5, and causes the game effect lamp 9 to flash red. At this time, the fifth instruction sound and normal mode presentation sound are continuously played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R (playback output priority: normal mode presentation sound < fifth instruction sound).

In this case, the first error image is in the [second layer] and the fifth instruction image is in the [third layer], so the display priority is fifth instruction image [third layer] < first error image [second layer].

Next, the example of the effect shown in Figure 8-23 (4) is similar to the example of the effect shown in Figure 8-21 (3), so explanation will be omitted.

[Example of a case where a performance using the game effect lamp 9 is executed in an amusement facility]
FIG. 8-25 shows an example of an amusement parlor where five pachinko gaming machines 1 are installed in a row. In this example, a parlor staff member is standing in front of the pachinko gaming machines 1, and all five pachinko gaming machines 1 are being played by players. In this figure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed closest to the staff member (installed on the front side) is referred to as "pachinko gaming machine 1A," and the pachinko gaming machines 1 installed further back from the staff member's perspective are referred to as "pachinko gaming machine 1B,""pachinko gaming machine 1C,""pachinko gaming machine 1D," and "pachinko gaming machine 1E." Note that, although players are seated in front of each pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing, the players are omitted from the illustration for convenience.

As shown in Figure 8-25, in each pachinko gaming machine 1 (pachinko gaming machine 1A, pachinko gaming machine 1B, pachinko gaming machine 1C, pachinko gaming machine 1D, pachinko gaming machine 1E), a changing display of decorative symbols is performed in the symbol display area of the image display device 5.

At this time, a ball-out error occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1D, and the presentation control CPU 120 executes a ball-out error notification presentation, displays the first error image EP1 on the image display device 5, and causes the game effect lamp 9 to flash red.

Depending on the position of the store clerk and the location where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, the visibility of the image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the store clerk may be low.
In this example, as shown in Figure 8-25, the visibility of the image display devices 5 of the pachinko gaming machines 1D and 1E to the store staff is significantly low. Therefore, even if the first error image is displayed on the image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1D, it is difficult for the store staff to recognize from the first error image that an error has occurred in that pachinko gaming machine.

On the other hand, regardless of the position of the store clerk or the location where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, the visibility of the game effect lamp 9 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the store clerk does not change significantly.
In this example, as shown in Figure 8-25, the visibility of the game effect lamps 9 of pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1E to store staff is not reduced. Therefore, when the game effect lamp 9 of pachinko gaming machine 1D is flashing red, the store staff can easily recognize that an error has occurred in that pachinko gaming machine based on the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

[Right-hand mode: Example of abnormal right-hand command]
Figure 8-26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image and effect sound of each effect related to the abnormal right hit instruction during the right hit mode (ST mode). Figure 8-27 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the abnormal right hit instruction during the right hit mode.

First, as shown in Figure 8-26 (1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol (Figure 8-27: T1), the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol begins in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display is displayed in the active display area. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 plays and outputs the ST mode effect sound (hereinafter referred to as "ST effect sound") related to the ST mode from speakers 8L and 8R.

At this time, based on the fact that the game mode is controlled to ST mode [Dream Dream Mode], the presentation control CPU 120 displays the words "Powerful Rush" in the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5, a presentation mode icon indicating the current presentation mode (in this example, an icon containing the words "Dream Dream Mode") in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, and a remaining ST count display indicating the remaining number of controls in ST mode (in this example, the words "150 remaining") in the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-26 (2), when the CPU 103 detects an abnormal left hit (Figure 8-27: T2), the effect control CPU 120 executes an abnormal right hit instruction effect, displays a fourth instruction image IP4 (in this example, an image including the words "right hit" and a right-pointing arrow object) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and plays and outputs a fourth instruction sound (in this example, the sound "Hit right") from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, although the ST mode effect sound is being played and output from speakers 8L and 8R, the playback output priority is ST mode effect sound < fourth instruction sound.

In this example, when the abnormal right-hit instruction effect is executed, the fourth instruction image IP4, which includes a right-pointing arrow object and the words "right hit," is an image that is controlled to frame in from the left edge of the screen of the image display device 5 and frame out toward the right edge of the screen. During the abnormal right-hit instruction effect, this display control is repeated twice (5000 ms).

Next, as shown in Figure 8-26 (3), when 5000 ms have passed since the start of the abnormal right-hit instruction presentation (Figure 8-27: T3), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the abnormal right-hit instruction presentation, erases the fourth instruction image IP4 (in this example, an image including the words "right hit" and a right-pointing arrow object) from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and ends the playback output of the fourth instruction sound (in this example, the sound "left hit") from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the ST mode presentation sound is being played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

[Right-hand mode: Example of abnormal left-hand hit detection during jackpot FF period]
Figure 8-28 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image, effect sound, and effect light of each effect related to the case where an abnormal left hit is detected during the right hit mode: jackpot mode (jackpot FF period). Figure 8-29 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the case where an abnormal left hit is detected during the right hit mode: jackpot mode (jackpot FF period).

The example of the effect shown in Figure 8-28 (1) is similar to the example of the effect shown in Figure 8-19 (3), so explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-28 (2), even if the CPU 103 detects an abnormal left hit during the jackpot FF period (Figure 8-29: T2), the presentation control CPU 120 does not execute the abnormal right hit instruction presentation, does not display the fourth instruction image IP4 (in this example, an image including the words "right hit" and a right-pointing arrow object) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and does not play or output the fourth instruction sound (in this example, the sound "right hit") from speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in steps S02TM1230 to S02TM1240 in Figure 8-9, even if an abnormal left hit is detected during the jackpot FF period, the processing of step S02TM1250 (processing to decide to execute the abnormal right hit instruction display) is skipped, so even if an abnormal left hit is detected during the jackpot FF period, the abnormal right hit instruction display is not executed.

[Right-hit mode (jackpot round period): Example of abnormal right-hit instruction]
Figure 8-30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images and sound effects of each effect related to an abnormal right-hit instruction during the right-hit mode (jackpot round period (hereinafter referred to as the "jackpot RD period" as appropriate)). Figure 8-31 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to an abnormal right-hit instruction during the right-hit mode (jackpot RD period).

First, as shown in Figure 8-30 (1), when the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the jackpot RD period in the jackpot gaming state (Figure 8-31: T1), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the jackpot RD presentation (first round), causes the image display device 5 to display a jackpot RD image (in this example, a background image of a mountain, sun, and musical notes, a round display ("1 ROUND") indicating the current round number, and a prize ball count display (00000 pt) indicating the number of awarded prize balls), and causes the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in rainbow colors. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 plays and outputs a jackpot round presentation sound (hereinafter referred to as "round presentation sound") from speakers 8L and 8R in connection with the jackpot RD presentation, causing the game effect lamp 9 to illuminate in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-30 (2), when the CPU 103 detects an abnormal left hit (Figure 8-31: T2), the effect control CPU 120 executes an abnormal right hit instruction effect, displays a fourth instruction image IP4 (in this example, an image including the words "right hit" and a right-pointing arrow object) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and plays and outputs a fourth instruction sound (in this example, the sound "Hit right") from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, although the jackpot round effect sound is being played and output from speakers 8L and 8R, the playback output priority is set to jackpot round effect sound < fourth instruction sound.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-30 (3), when 5000 ms have passed since the start of the abnormal right-hit instruction presentation (Figure 8-31: T3), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the abnormal right-hit instruction presentation, erases the fourth instruction image IP4 (in this example, an image including the words "right hit" and a right-pointing arrow object) from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and ends the playback output of the fourth instruction sound (in this example, the sound "Hit left") from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the jackpot round presentation sound is being played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

[Volume adjustment]
In this embodiment, a "volume value" is provided as a value related to the effect sound. The volume value is the upper limit (volume value) of the volume that can be output by the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this example, the volume value can be set between "1" and "3." This volume value can be set to any value by the player performing a predetermined operation (for example, operating the up and down buttons of the effect key provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1). Hereinafter, the volume value will be referred to as "master volume,""volume," etc. as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with up and down effect key buttons (hereinafter referred to as "volume adjustment buttons") as buttons for adjusting the volume value. When the up button of the up and down effect key buttons (hereinafter referred to as "volume adjustment button (+)") is operated, the volume value is set to a value obtained by adding "1" to the volume value before operating the up button, and when the down button of the up and down effect key buttons (hereinafter referred to as "volume adjustment button (-)") is operated, the volume value is set to a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the volume value before operating the down button.

In this embodiment, when the volume value is set to the maximum value "3," even if the volume adjustment button (+) is operated, the volume value cannot be set to a value greater than the maximum value, so operation of the volume adjustment button (+) is not accepted and the volume value is not changed. Similarly, when the volume value is set to the minimum value "1," even if the volume adjustment button (-) is operated, the volume value cannot be set to a value less than the minimum value, so operation of the volume adjustment button (-) is not accepted and the volume value is not changed.

In this embodiment, when the volume adjustment button is operated, a volume adjustment effect can be executed. The volume adjustment effect is composed of (A) an effect in which a volume adjustment display indicating the volume value after volume adjustment is displayed in the volume adjustment display area at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5, and (B) an effect in which a volume adjustment sound indicating the volume value after volume adjustment is played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Hereinafter, a volume adjustment effect corresponding to a volume value of "X" will be referred to as a "volume adjustment effect (volume value: X)", "volume adjustment effect (X)", etc., as appropriate.

(A) The volume adjustment display is an image including an object resembling a speaker and a meter corresponding to the volume value.
In this example, when the volume value is "1," if the operation of the volume adjustment button (+) is accepted, a volume adjustment display corresponding to a volume value of "2" is displayed in the volume adjustment display area of the image display device 5. Hereinafter, the volume adjustment display corresponding to a volume value of "X" will be referred to as "volume adjustment display (volume value: X),""volume adjustment display (X)," etc., as appropriate.

Note that, in the layer structure shown in Figure 8-13, the volume adjustment display is an image displayed on the third layer. Therefore, the volume adjustment display has a higher display priority than the normal effect image [fourth layer].

(B) The volume adjustment sound is a sound that indicates the volume value after the volume has been adjusted. If the volume value after the volume adjustment is "X," the sound "Volume has been set to X" is played and output.
In this example, when the volume value is "1" and the volume adjustment button (+) is operated, a volume adjustment sound "Volume set to 2" corresponding to the volume value being "2" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Hereinafter, the volume adjustment sound corresponding to the volume value being "X" will be referred to as "volume adjustment sound (volume value: X)", "volume adjustment sound (X)", etc., as appropriate.

Note that the volume adjustment audio is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be audio different from a voice audio containing a sentence such as "Volume has been set to X." For example, the volume adjustment audio may be a sound effect consisting only of sounds that do not contain sentences.

In this embodiment, after a volume adjustment button operation is accepted and the volume adjustment display is displayed in the volume adjustment display area of the image display device 5, if a predetermined period of time (in this example, 5 seconds) passes without accepting any new volume adjustment button operation, the volume adjustment display is erased from the volume adjustment display area of the image display device 5 (see Figure 8-32).

[Volume adjustment effect determination process]
8-32 is a flowchart showing the volume adjustment effect determination process executed when waiting for the start of fluctuation, at the start of fluctuation, during fluctuation, at the end of fluctuation, during a jackpot, etc. The effect control CPU 120 executes the volume adjustment effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-32 in the variable display start waiting process (step S170), variable display start setting process (step S171), variable display effect process (step S172), jackpot effect process (step S176), ending process (step S177), etc. of the effect control process shown in FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the player has operated the volume adjustment button (step S02TM3010). If the player has not operated the volume adjustment button (step S02TM3010: NO), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM3050.

If the player is operating the volume adjustment button (step S02TM3010: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether to accept operation of the volume adjustment button (step S02TM3020).

Volume adjustment button operation is accepted when the volume value can be changed by operating the volume adjustment button. For example, when the volume value is "1" and the volume adjustment button (+) is operated (volume value: 1 → 2), or when the volume value is "2" and the volume adjustment button (+) is operated (volume value: 2 → 3), volume adjustment button operation is accepted.

On the other hand, when volume adjustment button operation is not accepted, it means that the volume value cannot be changed even when the volume adjustment button is operated. For example, when the volume value is "1" and the volume adjustment button (-) is operated (volume value: 1 → ×), or when the volume value is "3" and the volume adjustment button (+) is operated (volume value: 3 → ×), volume adjustment button operation is not accepted.

If operation of the volume adjustment button is not accepted (step S02TM3020: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM3050.

If operation of the volume adjustment button is accepted (step S02TM3020: YES), the performance control CPU 120 executes a volume adjustment performance based on the operation of the volume adjustment button (step S02TM3030), sets the volume adjustment flag described below (step S02TM3040), and proceeds to step S03TM3050.

In this embodiment, the volume adjustment flag is a type of effect flag that is set when a volume adjustment effect is executed. When the volume adjustment flag is set, it becomes possible to determine that a volume adjustment effect has already been executed. This volume adjustment flag is cleared when the volume adjustment effect ends (see step S02TM3070).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether five seconds have passed since the volume adjustment flag was set (step S02TM3050). If five seconds have not passed since the volume adjustment flag was set (step S02TM3050: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If 5 seconds have passed since the volume adjustment flag was set (step S02TM3050: YES), the performance control CPU 120 ends the volume adjustment performance (step S02TM3060), clears the volume adjustment flag (step S02TM3070), and ends processing.

[Example of volume adjustment]
Fig. 8-33 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image and effect sound of each effect related to the volume adjustment. Fig. 8-34 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the volume adjustment.

The example of the presentation shown in Figure 8-33(1) will not be explained for the parts that are similar to the example of the presentation shown in Figure 8-14(1).
At this time, the volume is set to "1".

Next, as shown in Figure 8-33 (2), when operation of the volume adjustment button (+) is accepted (Figure 8-34: T2), the performance control CPU 120 executes a volume adjustment performance (volume value: 2), displays a volume adjustment display VP (volume value: 2) in the volume adjustment display area of the image display device 5, and plays and outputs a volume adjustment sound (volume value: 2) (in this example, the sound "Volume has been set to 2") from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, although the normal mode performance sound is being played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the playback output priority is normal mode performance sound < volume adjustment sound.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-33 (3), if five seconds pass after accepting operation of the volume adjustment button (+) without accepting any new volume adjustment button operation (Figure 8-34: T3), the performance control CPU 120 ends the volume adjustment performance (volume value: 2), erases the volume adjustment display VP (volume value: 2) from the volume adjustment display area of the image display device 5, and ends the playback output of the volume adjustment sound (volume value: 2) (in this example, the sound "Volume has been set to 2") from the speakers 8L and 8R.

[Light intensity adjustment]
In this embodiment, a "light intensity value" is provided as a value related to the effect light. The light intensity value is the upper limit (light intensity value) of the amount of light that can be emitted by the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this example, the light intensity value can be set between "1" and "3." This light intensity value can be set to any value by the player performing a predetermined operation (for example, operating the left and right buttons of the effect keys provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1). Hereinafter, the light intensity value will be referred to as "light intensity" or the like as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the left and right buttons of the effect keys provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the "light intensity adjustment buttons") are provided as buttons for adjusting the light intensity value. When the right button of the left and right effect keys (hereinafter referred to as the "light intensity adjustment button (+)") is operated, the light intensity value is set to a value obtained by adding "1" to the light intensity value before the right button was operated, and when the left button of the left and right effect keys (hereinafter referred to as the "light intensity adjustment button (-)") is operated, the light intensity value is set to a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the light intensity value before the left button was operated.

In this embodiment, when the light intensity value is set to the maximum value "3," even if the light intensity adjustment button (+) is operated, the light intensity value cannot be set to a value greater than the maximum value, so operation of the light intensity adjustment button (+) is not accepted. Similarly, when the light intensity value is set to the minimum value "1," even if the light intensity adjustment button (-) is operated, the light intensity value cannot be set to a value less than the minimum value, so operation of the light intensity adjustment button (-) is not accepted.

Note that, in the layer structure shown in Figure 8-13, the light intensity adjustment display is an image displayed on the third layer. Therefore, the light intensity adjustment display has a higher display priority than the normal effect image [fourth layer].

In this embodiment, a light intensity adjustment effect can be executed when the light intensity adjustment button is operated. The light intensity adjustment effect is composed of (A) an effect in which a light intensity adjustment display indicating the light intensity value after light intensity adjustment is displayed in the light intensity adjustment display area at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5, and (B) an effect in which a light intensity adjustment sound indicating the light intensity value after light intensity adjustment is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R. Hereinafter, a light intensity adjustment effect corresponding to a light intensity value of "Y" will be referred to as a "light intensity adjustment effect (light intensity value: Y)", "light intensity adjustment effect (Y)", etc., as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the volume adjustment display area where the volume adjustment display is displayed and the light adjustment display area where the light adjustment display is displayed are both located in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5, but they are different areas that do not overlap. Therefore, even when the volume adjustment display and the light adjustment display are displayed simultaneously, they are displayed without overlapping, and visibility is not reduced.

(A) The light intensity adjustment display is an image including an object resembling a light bulb and a meter corresponding to the light intensity value.
In this example, when the light intensity value is "1," if the light intensity adjustment button (+) is operated, a light intensity adjustment display corresponding to a light intensity value of "2" is displayed in the light intensity adjustment display area of the image display device 5. Hereinafter, the light intensity adjustment display corresponding to a light intensity value of "Y" will be referred to as "light intensity adjustment display (light intensity value: Y),""light intensity adjustment display (Y)," etc., as appropriate.

(B) The light intensity adjustment sound is a sound that indicates the light intensity value after the light intensity has been adjusted. If the light intensity value after the light intensity adjustment is “Y”, the sound “The light intensity has been set to Y” is played and output.
In this example, when the light intensity value is "1," upon receiving an operation of the light intensity adjustment button (+), a light intensity adjustment sound "Light intensity set to 2" corresponding to the light intensity value being "2" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Hereinafter, the light intensity adjustment sound corresponding to the light intensity value being "Y" will be referred to as "light intensity adjustment sound (light intensity value: Y),""light intensity adjustment sound (Y)," etc., as appropriate.

Note that the light intensity adjustment sound is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be a sound different from a voice sound containing a sentence such as "The light intensity has been set to Y." For example, the light intensity adjustment sound may be a sound effect consisting only of sounds that do not contain sentences.

In this embodiment, after the light intensity adjustment button is operated and the light intensity adjustment display is displayed in the light intensity adjustment display area of the image display device 5, if a predetermined period of time (in this example, 5 seconds) passes without any new light intensity adjustment button operation being accepted, the light intensity adjustment display will be erased from the light intensity adjustment display area of the image display device 5 (see Figure 8-35).

In this embodiment, during the waiting period for the fluctuation to begin after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, a menu screen can be displayed that allows you to adjust the volume, light intensity, and set the auto button (described below), and you can adjust the volume and light intensity on this menu screen.

[Light intensity adjustment effect determination process]
8-35 is a flowchart showing the light intensity adjustment effect determination process executed when waiting for fluctuation to start, at the start of fluctuation, during fluctuation, at the end of fluctuation, during a jackpot, etc. The effect control CPU 120 executes the light intensity adjustment effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-35 in the variable display start waiting process (step S170), variable display start setting process (step S171), variable display effect process (step S172), jackpot effect process (step S176), ending process (step S177), etc. of the effect control process shown in FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the player has operated the light intensity adjustment button (step S02TM4010). If the player has not operated the light intensity adjustment button (step S02TM4010: NO), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4050.

If the player is operating the light intensity adjustment button (step S02TM4010: YES), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether to accept operation of the light intensity adjustment button (step S02TM4020).

Operation of the light intensity adjustment button is accepted when the light intensity value can be changed by operating the light intensity adjustment button. For example, operation of the light intensity adjustment button is accepted when the light intensity value is "1" and the light intensity adjustment button (+) is operated (light intensity value: 1 → 2), or when the light intensity value is "2" and the light intensity adjustment button (+) is operated (light intensity value: 2 → 3).

On the other hand, when the light intensity adjustment button is not accepted, it means that the light intensity value cannot be changed even when the light intensity adjustment button is operated. For example, when the light intensity value is "1" and the light intensity adjustment button (-) is operated (light intensity value: 1 → ×), or when the light intensity value is "3" and the light intensity adjustment button (+) is operated (light intensity value: 3 → ×), the light intensity adjustment button will not be accepted.

If operation of the light intensity adjustment button is not accepted (step S02TM4020: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4050.

If operation of the light intensity adjustment button is accepted (step S02TM4020: YES), the performance control CPU 120 executes a light intensity adjustment performance based on the operation of the light intensity adjustment button (step S02TM4030), sets the light intensity adjustment flag described below (step S02TM4040), and proceeds to step S03TM4050.

In this embodiment, the light intensity adjustment flag is a type of effect flag that is set when a light intensity adjustment effect is executed. When the light intensity adjustment flag is set, it becomes possible to determine that a light intensity adjustment effect has already been executed. This light intensity adjustment flag is cleared when the light intensity adjustment effect ends (see step S02TM4070).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether five seconds have passed since the light intensity adjustment flag was set (step S02TM4050). If five seconds have not passed since the light intensity adjustment flag was set (step S02TM4050: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends processing.

If 5 seconds have passed since the light intensity adjustment flag was set (step S02TM4050: YES), the performance control CPU 120 ends the light intensity adjustment performance (step S02TM4060), clears the light intensity adjustment flag (step S02TM4070), and ends processing.

[Example of light intensity adjustment]
Fig. 8-36 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image and effect sound of each effect related to the light intensity adjustment. Fig. 8-37 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the light intensity adjustment.

The example of presentation shown in Figure 8-36(1) will not be explained for the parts that are similar to the example of presentation shown in Figure 8-14(1).
At this time, the light intensity is set to "1".

Next, as shown in Figure 8-36 (2), when operation of the light intensity adjustment button (+) is accepted (Figure 8-37: T2), the performance control CPU 120 executes a light intensity adjustment performance (volume value: 2), displays the light intensity adjustment display LP (volume value: 2) in the light intensity adjustment display area of the image display device 5, and plays and outputs a light intensity adjustment sound (volume value: 2) (in this example, the sound "Light intensity has been set to 2") from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, although the normal mode performance sound is being played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the playback output priority is normal mode performance sound < light intensity adjustment sound.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-36 (3), if five seconds pass after accepting operation of the light intensity adjustment button (+) without accepting any new light intensity adjustment button operation (Figure 8-37: T3), the performance control CPU 120 will end the light intensity adjustment performance (volume value: 2), erase the light intensity adjustment display LP (volume value: 2) from the light intensity adjustment display area of the image display device 5, and end the playback output of the light intensity adjustment audio (volume value: 2) (in this example, the audio "Light intensity has been set to 2") from the speakers 8L and 8R.

[Normal mode: Volume adjustment → Right-hand mode: Big hit FF effect]
8-38 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images and effect sounds of each effect related to the case where the game is controlled to the jackpot game state and the jackpot FF effect is started when the volume adjustment effect started during the normal mode is being executed. FIG. 8-39 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the case where the game is controlled to the jackpot game state and the jackpot FF effect is started when the volume adjustment effect started during the normal mode is being executed.

First, the explanation of the example of presentation shown in Figure 8-38(1) will be omitted for the parts that are similar to the example of presentation shown in Figure 8-21(1).
At this time, the volume is set to "1".

Next, as shown in Figure 8-38 (2), when operation of the volume adjustment button (+) is accepted (Figure 8-39: T2), the performance control CPU 120 executes a volume adjustment performance (volume value: 2), displays the volume adjustment display VP (volume value: 2) in the volume adjustment display area of the image display device 5, and plays and outputs the volume adjustment sound (volume value: 2) (in this example, the "Volume set to 2" part of the sound "Volume has been set to 2") from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, although the normal mode performance sound is being played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the playback output priority is normal mode performance sound < volume adjustment sound.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-38 (3), if the CPU 103 controls the game state to the jackpot game state before 5 seconds have elapsed since the volume adjustment effect began (Figure 8-39: T3), the effect control CPU 120 will start the jackpot FF effect, cause the image display device 5 to display the first jackpot type notification image BP1 (in this example, an image including a convergent line and the word "BONUS"), and play and output the jackpot FF effect sound from speakers 8L and 8R.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the volume adjustment effect, continues to display the volume adjustment display VP (volume value: 2) in the volume adjustment display area of the image display device 5, and continues to play and output the volume adjustment sound (volume value: 2) from speakers 8L and 8R (in this example, the sound "Set", which is the part after "Volume set to 2" in the sound "Volume set to 2"). At this time, the jackpot FF effect sound is also played and output from speakers 8L and 8R, but the playback output priority is jackpot FF effect sound = volume adjustment sound. In other words, the jackpot FF effect sound and the volume adjustment sound are heard equally by the player.

Then, when five seconds have passed since the volume adjustment effect began (Figure 8-39: T4), the effect control CPU 120 ends the volume adjustment effect, erases the volume adjustment display VP (volume value: 2) from the volume adjustment display area of the image display device 5, and ends the playback output of the volume adjustment sound (volume value: 2) from the speakers 8L and 8R (not shown).

[Normal mode: Light intensity adjustment → Right-hand mode: Big hit FF effect]
8-40 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images and effect sounds of each effect related to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state and a jackpot FF effect is started when a light intensity adjustment effect started during normal mode is being executed. FIG. 8-41 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state and a jackpot FF effect is started when a light intensity adjustment effect started during normal mode is being executed.

First, the explanation of the example of presentation shown in Figure 8-40 (1) will be omitted for the parts that are similar to the example of presentation shown in Figure 8-21 (1).
At this time, the light intensity is set to "1".

Next, as shown in Figure 8-40 (2), when operation of the light intensity adjustment button (+) is accepted (Figure 8-41: T2), the performance control CPU 120 executes the light intensity adjustment performance (light intensity value: 2), displays the light intensity adjustment display LP (light intensity value: 2) in the light intensity adjustment display area of the image display device 5, and plays and outputs the light intensity adjustment sound (light intensity value: 2) from the speakers 8L and 8R (in this example, the sound "Set light intensity to 2" from the sound "Light intensity has been set to 2"). At this time, although the normal mode performance sound is being played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the playback output priority is normal mode performance sound < light intensity adjustment sound.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-40 (3), if the CPU 103 controls the game state to the jackpot game state before 5 seconds have elapsed since the light intensity adjustment effect began (Figure 8-41: T3), the effect control CPU 120 will start the jackpot FF effect, cause the image display device 5 to display the first jackpot type notification image BP1 (in this example, an image including a convergent line and the word "BONUS"), and play and output the jackpot FF effect sound from speakers 8L and 8R.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the light intensity adjustment effect, continues to display the light intensity adjustment display LP (light intensity value: 2) in the light intensity adjustment display area of the image display device 5, and continues to play and output the light intensity adjustment sound (light intensity value: 2) from speakers 8L and 8R (in this example, the sound "Set", which is the part after "Light intensity to 2" in the sound "Light intensity has been set to 2"). At this time, the jackpot FF effect sound is also played and output from speakers 8L and 8R, but the playback output priority is jackpot FF effect sound = light intensity adjustment sound.

Then, when five seconds have passed since the light intensity adjustment effect began (Figure 8-41: T4), the effect control CPU 120 ends the light intensity adjustment effect, erases the light intensity adjustment display LP (light intensity value: 2) from the light intensity adjustment display area of the image display device 5, and ends the playback output of the light intensity adjustment sound (light intensity value: 2) from the speakers 8L and 8R (not shown).

[Auto button]
In this embodiment, various effects (hereinafter referred to as "operation-required effects") can be executed in response to an operation on the operation unit (stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.). An effect that prompts the player to operate the operation unit is referred to as an "operation prompt effect." In this embodiment, the operation-required effect is executed after the operation prompt effect is executed.

In situations where operation of the operation unit is required in operation promotion effects, an "auto button" can be implemented on the pachinko gaming machine 1 to automatically operate the operation unit. The mode related to this auto button is called "auto button mode," and when the auto button mode is enabled it is called "auto button ON mode," and when this auto button mode is disabled it is called "auto button OFF mode."

When the auto button is set to OFF mode, if an operation of the operation unit is requested in an operation prompt presentation, if the operation unit is operated, the subsequent operation required presentation will be executed, but if the operation unit is not operated, the subsequent operation required presentation will not be executed (see Figure 8-43).
Also, when the auto button ON mode is set, if the operation of the operation section is requested in the operation prompt presentation, the subsequent operation required presentation will be executed regardless of whether the operation section is operated or not (see Figure 8-44).

In this embodiment, the operational effects include an expectation prediction effect that uses a cut-in image before a reach is reached to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, a final decision button effect that notifies the display result based on operation on the operation unit during an SP reach, and a RUSH entry notification effect that notifies during the first hit whether or not the game will be controlled to ST mode after the jackpot.

In this embodiment, the auto button mode can be switched by performing a specific operation on the operation unit.
For example, when the auto button OFF mode is set and no operation-required effects are being executed, pressing and holding the push button 31B for three seconds switches the mode from the auto button OFF mode to the auto button ON mode. Also, when the auto button ON mode is set, pressing and holding the push button 31B for three seconds switches the mode from the auto button ON mode to the auto button OFF mode.

In addition, during the waiting period for the fluctuation to begin after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, a menu screen can be displayed that allows you to adjust the volume, light intensity, and auto button settings, and you can set the auto button mode on this menu screen.

In this embodiment, when the auto button mode is switched, an auto button setting effect can be executed to indicate to the player the newly set auto button mode.

When the auto button OFF mode is selected, the auto button OFF setting display (in this example, an icon containing the words "Auto button has been deactivated") is displayed in the auto button setting display area (bottom left of the screen) of the image display device 5, and the auto button OFF setting sound (in this example, the sound "Auto button has been deactivated") is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R. This type of auto button setting display when the auto button OFF mode is selected is referred to as the "auto button OFF setting display" where appropriate.

When the auto button ON mode is selected, the auto button ON setting display (in this example, an icon containing the words "Auto button set") is displayed in the auto button setting display area (bottom left of the screen) of the image display device 5, and the auto button ON setting sound (in this example, the sound "Auto button set") is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R. This auto button setting display when the auto button ON mode is selected will be referred to as the "auto button ON setting display" where appropriate.

Note that, in the layer structure shown in Figure 8-13, the auto button setting display is an image displayed on the third layer. Therefore, the auto button setting display has a higher display priority than the normal effect image [fourth layer].

Note that, without being limited to the above embodiment, the auto button setting sound (auto button OFF setting sound, auto button ON setting sound) may be a sound that is different from the voice sound that includes text. For example, the auto button setting sound may be a sound effect that is composed only of sounds that do not include text.

In this embodiment, after the auto button setting display (auto button OFF setting display, auto button ON setting display) is displayed in the auto button setting display area of the image display device 5, if a predetermined period (in this example, 5 seconds) passes without a new auto button mode change, the auto button setting display is erased from the auto button setting display area of the image display device 5 (see Figure 8-42).

[Auto button effect determination process]
8-42 is a flowchart showing the auto button effect determination process executed when waiting for the start of fluctuation, at the start of fluctuation, during fluctuation, at the end of fluctuation, during a jackpot, etc. The effect control CPU 120 executes the auto button effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-42 in the variable display start waiting process (step S170), variable display start setting process (step S171), variable display effect process (step S172), jackpot effect process (step S176), ending process (step S177), etc. of the effect control process shown in FIG.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the Auto Button OFF mode has been newly set (step S02TM5010). If the Auto Button OFF mode has not been set (step S02TM5010: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM5040.

If the auto button OFF mode is set (step S02TM5010: YES), the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the auto button OFF setting performance (step S02TM5020), sets the auto button OFF setting flag (described below) (step S02TM5030), and proceeds to step S02TM5040.

In this embodiment, the auto button OFF setting flag is a type of effect flag that is set when the auto button OFF setting effect is executed. When the auto button OFF setting flag is set, it becomes possible to determine that the auto button OFF setting effect has already been executed. This auto button OFF setting flag is cleared when the auto button OFF setting effect ends or when the auto button ON setting flag, described below, is set.

Next, it is determined whether 5 seconds have passed since the auto button OFF setting flag was set (step S02TM5040). In this determination, with the auto button OFF setting flag set, it is determined whether 5 seconds have passed since the auto button OFF setting flag was set.

If five seconds have not passed since the Auto Button OFF setting flag was set (step S02TM5040: NO), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the Auto Button ON setting flag is set (step S02TM5045). If the Auto Button ON setting flag is not set (step S02TM5045: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM5060.

If the auto button ON setting flag is set (step S02TM5045: YES), or after step S02TM5040: YES, the performance control CPU 120 decides to end the auto button OFF setting performance (step S02TM5050) and proceeds to step S02TM5060.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the Auto Button ON mode has been newly set (step S02TM5060). If the Auto Button ON mode has not been set (step S02TM5060: NO), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM5090.

If the Auto Button ON mode is set (step S02TM5060: YES), the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the Auto Button ON setting performance (step S02TM5070), sets the Auto Button ON setting flag (described below) (step S02TM5080), and proceeds to step S02TM5090.

In this embodiment, the auto button ON setting flag is a type of effect flag that is set when the auto button ON setting effect is executed. When the auto button ON setting flag is set, it becomes possible to determine that the auto button ON setting effect has already been executed. This auto button ON setting flag is cleared when the auto button ON setting effect ends or when the auto button OFF setting flag is set.

Next, it is determined whether 5 seconds have passed since the auto button ON setting flag was set (step S02TM5090). In this determination, it is determined whether 5 seconds have passed since the auto button ON setting flag was set, while the auto button ON setting flag is set.

If five seconds have not passed since the Auto Button ON setting flag was set (step S02TM5090: NO), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the Auto Button OFF setting flag is set (step S02TM5095). If the Auto Button OFF setting flag is not set (step S02TM5095: NO), the performance control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the auto button OFF setting flag is set (step S02TM5095: YES), or after step S02TM5090: YES, the performance control CPU 120 decides to end the auto button ON setting performance (step S02TM5100) and ends processing.

In this embodiment, if it is decided to execute an auto button setting effect (auto button OFF setting effect, auto button ON setting effect) during the auto button setting effect decision process, the auto button setting effect may be executed simultaneously with the process that decided to execute the auto button setting effect, or the auto button setting effect may be executed at a predetermined timing after the process that decided to execute the auto button setting effect.

In this example, if it is decided to execute the auto button setting effect in the auto button setting effect decision process, the auto button setting effect will be executed at a predetermined timing after the process in which it was decided to execute the auto button setting effect.

If, during the auto button setting effect determination process, a decision is made to execute a new auto button setting effect when none of the auto button setting effects are being executed, the new auto button setting effect is executed immediately after the auto button setting effect determination process is completed. Similarly, during the auto button setting effect determination process, if a decision is made to execute a new auto button setting effect when one of the auto button setting effects is being executed, the new auto button setting effect is executed immediately after the auto button setting effect determination process is completed.

In this embodiment, if it is decided to end the auto button setting effect (auto button OFF setting effect, auto button ON setting effect) during the auto button setting effect decision process, the auto button setting effect may be ended at the same time as the process that decided to end the auto button setting effect, or the auto button setting effect may be ended at a predetermined timing after the process that decided to end the auto button setting effect.

In this example, if it is decided to end the auto button setting effect during the auto button setting effect decision process, the auto button setting effect will end at the same time as the process that decides to end the auto button setting effect.

[Example of Auto Button OFF Mode]
FIG. 8-43 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images and sound effects of each effect related to the auto button OFF mode.

As shown in Figure 8-43 (1), when the auto button OFF mode is set, the performance control CPU 120 executes the auto button OFF setting performance, displays the auto button OFF setting display ABP1 (in this example, an icon containing the words "auto button has been deactivated") in the auto button setting display area (bottom left of the screen) of the image display device 5, and plays and outputs the auto button OFF setting sound (in this example, the sound "auto button has been deactivated") from the speakers 8L and 8R.
Other examples of presentation are the same as those shown in Figure 8-14 (1), so explanations will be omitted.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-43 (2), when the auto button OFF mode is set, the effect control CPU 120 executes a button effect (operation prompt effect) corresponding to the expectation level advance notice effect, and displays an operation prompt display BT (in this example, an image including an image imitating the push button 31B, the words "PRESS!!", a downward arrow object, and a time bar indicating the validity period for operating the operation unit) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on an effect image such as a decorative pattern, to prompt the player to operate the operation unit (in this example, the push button 31B).

In this state, if the player operates the operation unit, the process proceeds to Figure 8-43 (3A); if the player does not operate the operation unit, the process proceeds to Figure 8-43 (3B).

(Operation on the control panel)
As shown in Figure 8-43 (3A), when the auto button is set to OFF mode and the player operates the operation unit, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation executes an expectation prediction presentation, and displays a cut-in image CIP (in this example, an image containing the word "chance") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a presentation image such as a decorative pattern.

(No operation on the control panel)
As shown in Figure 8-43 (3B), when the auto button is set to OFF mode and the player does not operate the operation unit, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation will not execute the expectation prediction presentation and will not display the cut-off image CIP on the image display device 5.

[Example of Auto Button ON mode]
FIG. 8-44 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images and sound effects of each effect related to the auto button ON mode.

As shown in Figure 8-44 (1), when the auto button ON mode is set, the performance control CPU 120 executes the auto button ON setting performance, displays the auto button ON setting display ABP2 (in this example, an icon containing the words "Auto button has been set") in the auto button setting display area (bottom left of the screen) of the image display device 5, and plays and outputs the auto button ON setting sound (in this example, the sound "Auto button has been set") from the speakers 8L and 8R.
Other examples of presentation are the same as those shown in Figure 8-14 (1), so explanations will be omitted.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-44 (2), when the auto button ON mode is set, the effect control CPU 120 executes a button effect (operation prompt effect) corresponding to the expectation level preview effect, and displays an operation prompt display BT (in this example, an image including an image imitating the push button 31B, the words "PRESS!!", a downward arrow object, and a time bar indicating the validity period for operating the operation unit) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on an effect image such as a decorative pattern, to prompt the player to operate the operation unit (in this example, the push button 31B).

In this state, if the player operates the operation unit, the process proceeds to Figure 8-44 (3A); if the player does not operate the operation unit, the process proceeds to Figure 8-44 (3B).

(Operation on the control panel)
As shown in Figure 8-44 (3A), when the auto button is set to ON mode and the player operates the operation unit, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation executes an expectation prediction presentation, and displays a cut-in image CIP (in this example, an image containing the word "chance") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a presentation image such as a decorative pattern.

(No operation on the control panel)
As shown in Figure 8-44 (3B), when the auto button is set to ON mode and the player does not operate the operation unit, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation executes an expectation prediction presentation, and displays a cut-in image CIP (in this example, an image containing the word "chance") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, superimposed on a presentation image such as a decorative pattern.

Therefore, in auto button OFF mode, if no operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation prompt performance, the subsequent operation required performance will not be executed, whereas in auto button ON mode, the subsequent operation required performance will be executed regardless of whether any operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation prompt performance.

[Normal mode: Auto button OFF mode → Right-hand mode: Big hit FF effect]
Fig. 8-45 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images and effect sounds of each effect related to the case where the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state and the jackpot FF effect is started when the auto button OFF setting effect started during the normal mode is being executed. Fig. 8-46 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the case where the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state and the jackpot FF effect is started when the auto button OFF setting effect started during the normal mode is being executed.

First, we will omit the explanation of the parts of the presentation example shown in Figure 8-45 (1) that are similar to the presentation example shown in Figure 8-21 (1).

Next, as shown in Figure 8-45 (2), when the auto button OFF mode is set (Figure 8-46: T2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the auto button OFF setting effect, displays the auto button OFF setting display ABP1 (in this example, an icon containing the words "Auto button has been deactivated") in the auto button setting display area (bottom left of the screen) of the image display device 5, and plays and outputs the auto button OFF setting sound (in this example, the "auto button" part of the sound "auto button has been deactivated") from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, although the normal mode effect sound is being played and output from speakers 8L and 8R, the playback output priority is normal mode effect sound < auto button OFF setting sound.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-45 (3), if the CPU 103 controls the game state to the jackpot game state before three seconds have elapsed since the auto button OFF setting effect began (Figure 8-46: T3), the effect control CPU 120 will start the jackpot FF effect, cause the image display device 5 to display the first jackpot type notification image BP1 (in this example, an image including a convergent line and the word "BONUS"), and cause the speakers 8L and 8R to play and output the jackpot FF effect sound.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the auto button OFF setting effect, continues to display the auto button OFF setting display ABP1 (in this example, an icon containing the words "Auto button has been deactivated") in the auto button setting display area (bottom left of the screen) of the image display device 5, and plays and outputs the auto button OFF setting sound (in this example, the "deactivated" part of the sound "Auto button has been deactivated") from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the jackpot FF effect sound is also played and output from speakers 8L and 8R, but the playback output priority is jackpot FF effect sound = auto button OFF setting sound. In other words, the jackpot FF effect sound and the auto button OFF setting sound sound sound the same to the player.

Then, when three seconds have passed since the auto button OFF setting effect began (Figure 8-46: T4), the effect control CPU 120 ends the auto button OFF setting effect, erases the auto button OFF setting display ABP1 (in this example, an icon containing the words "Auto button has been deactivated") from the auto button setting display area of the image display device 5, and ends the playback output of the auto button OFF setting audio from speakers 8L and 8R (not shown).

[Normal mode: Auto button ON mode → Right-hand mode: Big hit FF effect]
Fig. 8-47 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images and effect sounds of each effect related to the case where the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state and the jackpot FF effect is started when the auto button ON setting effect started during the normal mode is being executed. Fig. 8-48 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the case where the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state and the jackpot FF effect is started when the auto button ON setting effect started during the normal mode is being executed.

First, we will omit the explanation of the parts of the presentation example shown in Figure 8-47 (1) that are similar to the presentation example shown in Figure 8-21 (1).

Next, as shown in Figure 8-47 (2), when the auto button ON mode is set (Figure 8-48: T2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the auto button ON setting effect, displays the auto button ON setting display ABP2 (in this example, an icon containing the words "Auto button set") in the auto button setting display area (bottom left of the screen) of the image display device 5, and plays and outputs the auto button ON setting sound (in this example, the "to the auto button" part of the sound "Auto button set") from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, although the normal mode effect sound is being played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the playback output priority is normal mode effect sound < auto button ON setting sound.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-47 (3), if the CPU 103 controls the game state to the jackpot game state before three seconds have elapsed since the auto button ON setting effect began (Figure 8-48: T3), the effect control CPU 120 will start the jackpot FF effect, cause the image display device 5 to display the first jackpot type notification image BP1 (in this example, an image including a convergent line and the word "BONUS"), and cause the speakers 8L and 8R to play and output the jackpot FF effect sound.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the auto button ON setting effect, continues to display the auto button ON setting display ABP2 (in this example, an icon containing the words "Auto button set") in the auto button setting display area (bottom left of the screen) of the image display device 5, and plays and outputs the auto button ON setting sound (in this example, the "Set" part of the sound "Auto button set") from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, the jackpot FF effect sound is also played and output from speakers 8L and 8R, but the playback output priority is jackpot FF effect sound = auto button ON setting sound. In other words, the jackpot FF effect sound and the auto button ON setting sound sound sound the same to the player.

Then, when three seconds have passed since the auto button ON setting effect began (Figure 8-48: T4), the effect control CPU 120 ends the auto button ON setting effect, erases the auto button ON setting display ABP2 (in this example, an icon containing the words "Auto button set") from the auto button setting display area of the image display device 5, and ends the playback output of the auto button ON setting audio from speakers 8L and 8R (not shown).

[About simultaneous execution of volume adjustment effects, light intensity adjustment effects, and auto button setting effects]
In this embodiment, it is possible to simultaneously execute at least two or more of the volume adjustment effect, the light intensity adjustment effect, and the auto button setting effect. As described above, the volume adjustment display area capable of displaying a volume adjustment display related to the volume adjustment effect, the light intensity adjustment display area capable of displaying a light intensity adjustment display related to the light intensity adjustment effect, and the auto button setting display area capable of displaying an auto button setting display related to the auto button setting effect are all different areas, so that these effects can be executed simultaneously in terms of the effect images.

In addition, by adopting the effect control methods (X1) to (X3) shown below as a method for playing and outputting sound effects related to the volume adjustment effect, light intensity adjustment effect, and auto button setting effect, it is possible to simultaneously execute these effects in terms of sound effects.

The following describes a case where two effects that start at different times are executed simultaneously over a certain period of time. The effect that starts first is referred to as the "first effect," and the effect that starts while the first effect is being executed is referred to as the "second effect." Furthermore, the effect sound associated with the first effect is referred to as the "first effect sound," the effect image as the "first effect image," the effect sound associated with the second effect is referred to as the "second effect sound," and the effect image as the "second effect image." The following (X1) to (X3) are examples of effect control methods when the second effect sound is played and output while the first effect sound is being played and output.
(X1) After the first sound effect has been played back to the end, the second sound effect is played back. (X2) The first sound effect is stopped and the second sound effect is played back. (X3) The second sound effect is played back while the first sound effect is being played back.

(X1) Playing out the first sound effect until the end, then playing out the second sound effect By playing out the first sound effect until the last character of the sentence that makes up the first sound effect, then playing out the second sound effect, it becomes possible to execute the first and second sounds effected simultaneously.

For example, if the first effect is a volume adjustment effect (volume value: 2) and the second effect is a light intensity adjustment effect (light intensity value: 2), after the volume adjustment audio "Volume has been set to 2" up to the "ta" is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R, the light intensity adjustment audio "Light intensity has been set to 2" begins to be played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R. Therefore, the audio "Volume has been set to 2" + "Light intensity has been set to 2" is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

Note that if the first sound effect repeats the same phrase two or more times, the second sound effect may be started after only one phrase has been played back. For example, if the first sound effect repeats the phrase "Volume set to X" twice, the first sound effect may be stopped after the phrase "Volume set to X" has been played back once, and the second sound effect may be started.

(X2) The playback output of the first sound effect is stopped and the second sound effect is played back. Even if the first sound effect is in the middle of being played back, the playback output of the first sound effect can be stopped (ended) and the second sound effect played back at the timing when the second effect starts, thereby making it possible to execute the first and second effects simultaneously.

For example, if the first effect is a volume adjustment effect (volume value: 2) and the second effect is a light adjustment effect (light value: 2), when the light adjustment effect is executed at the timing when the volume adjustment audio "Volume set to 2" up to "Volume to 2" is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R, the playback and output of the volume adjustment audio is immediately interrupted and the playback and output of the light adjustment audio "Light intensity set to 2" begins from speakers 8L and 8R. Therefore, the audio "Volume set to 2" + "Light intensity set to 2" is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

(X3) Playing and outputting the second effect sound while continuing to play and output the first effect sound When the second effect starts while the first effect sound is being played and output, continuing to play and output the first effect sound and playing and outputting the second effect sound makes it possible to execute the first effect and the second effect simultaneously.

For example, if the first effect is a volume adjustment effect (volume value: 2) and the second effect is a light adjustment effect (light value: 2), when the light adjustment effect is executed at the timing when the volume adjustment audio "Volume set to 2" up to "Volume to 2" is played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R, the volume adjustment audio "Volume set to 2" will continue to be played back and output from "Set" onwards, and the light adjustment audio "Light intensity set to 2" will begin to be played back and output. Therefore, after the audio "Volume set to 2", the audio "Set" and "Light intensity set to 2" will be played back and output simultaneously from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this case, since the sounds are reproduced and output in overlapping fashion, it is possible to set a reproduction output priority for each sound, but it is not necessary to do so.
For example, when the first and second sound effects are played back in overlapping fashion, the playback output priority may be: first sound effect = second sound effect, first sound effect < second sound effect, second sound effect < first sound effect.

In this embodiment, when the second effect is executed while the first effect is being executed, the start timing of each effect of the second effect (second effect image, second effect sound) is as follows:
(A) Performance image: The second performance starts and the display of the performance image begins. (B) Performance sound: The performance control will be adopted in which the playback output of the performance sound begins according to the methods (1) to (3) described above.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and the effect image of the second effect may also employ effect control methods similar to the effect sound effect control methods (X1) to (X3) described above.

For example, the following production control methods (Y1) to (Y3) may be used for the production image.
(Y1) After the first effect image is displayed to the end, the second effect image is displayed → The second effect starts after the first effect ends. (Y2) The first effect image is moved to the middle and the second effect image is displayed → The first effect is moved to the middle and the second effect starts. (Y3) The second effect image is displayed while the first effect image is still displayed → The second effect starts while the first effect is still displayed.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and the above-mentioned production control method for sound effects and the above-mentioned production control method for image effects may be combined and adopted.

For example, for the second effect (effect image, effect sound), the effect control methods (Z1) to (Z9) shown below may be used.
(Z1): Sound effects (X1) + image effects (Y1)
(Z2): Sound effects (X1) + image effects (Y2)
(Z3): Sound effects (X1) + image effects (Y3)
(Z4): Sound effects (X2) + image effects (Y1)
(Z5): Sound effects (X2) + image effects (Y2)
(Z6): Sound effects (X2) + image effects (Y3)
(Z7): Sound effects (X3) + image effects (Y1)
(Z8): Sound effects (X3) + image effects (Y2)
(Z9): Sound effects (X3) + image effects (Y3)

Note that even if the first and second effects start simultaneously, each effect can be executed using the effect control method described above.

[Example of simultaneous display of volume adjustment, light intensity adjustment, and auto button setting]
8-49 and 8-50 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the effect images and sound effects of each effect associated with the simultaneous display of the volume adjustment display, the light intensity adjustment display, and the auto button setting display. Fig. 8-51 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect associated with the simultaneous display of the volume adjustment display, the light intensity adjustment display, and the auto button setting display.

This example shows an example of a case where the above-mentioned method (1) is used to play and output sound effects related to the volume adjustment effect, light intensity adjustment effect, and auto button setting effect.

First, the explanation of the example of presentation shown in Figure 8-49 (1) (Figure 8-51: T1) that is similar to the example of presentation shown in Figure 8-33 (2) will be omitted.
At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes a volume adjustment performance, and reproduces and outputs the "Volume to 2" part of the volume adjustment sound (volume value: 2) from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the example of presentation shown in Figure 8-49 (2) (Figure 8-51: T2) will not be explained for the parts that are similar to the example of presentation shown in Figure 8-36 (2).
At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes the volume adjustment performance and also executes the light intensity adjustment performance, and while the volume adjustment display VP is displayed in the volume adjustment display area of the image display device 5, it displays the light intensity adjustment display LP in the light adjustment display area of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs from the speakers 8L and 8R the part of the volume adjustment sound (volume value: 2) that follows "Volume set to 2", namely "Setting completed".

Next, as shown in Figure 8-49 (3), when the playback output of the volume adjustment audio has finished (Figure 8-51: T1B), the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs the "light amount" part of the light amount adjustment audio (light amount value: 2) from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-50 (4), when the auto button ON mode is set (Figure 8-51: T3), the performance control CPU 120 executes the auto button ON setting performance, and displays the volume adjustment display VP in the volume adjustment display area of the image display device 5 and the light adjustment display LP in the light adjustment display area of the image display device 5, while displaying the auto button ON setting display ABP2 (in this example, an icon containing the words "Auto button set") in the auto button setting display area of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs the part of the light intensity adjustment audio (volume value: 2) following "Light intensity" - "Set to 2" - from speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-50 (5), when the playback output of the light intensity adjustment audio has finished (Figure 8-51: T2B), the performance control CPU 120 plays and outputs the "Auto button set" part of the auto button ON setting audio from speakers 8L and 8R.

[Jackpot FF performance]
In this embodiment, after a variable display showing the display result as "jackpot" is executed, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and when a jackpot start command is received, a jackpot FF effect (jackpot fanfare effect) is executed. The jackpot FF effect is composed of a jackpot FF effect (first part) that indicates the type of jackpot and displays the title of the jackpot, and a jackpot FF effect (second part) that executes a normal right-hit instruction that instructs the operation method in jackpot RD game (jackpot round game).

<Jackpot A, Jackpot B>
In this embodiment, in the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) corresponding to the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B), a first jackpot type notification image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The first jackpot type notification image is an image including a convergent line and the word "BONUS." The jackpot FF presentation (part 1) corresponding to the first hit is composed of a first stage and a second stage (1) to (5), and is executed in the following order: first stage → second stage (1) → second stage (2) → second stage (3) → second stage (4) → second stage (5). The first stage and the second stages (1) to (5) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) corresponding to the first hit have the presentation configuration shown below.

Figure 8-52 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the presentation image for each presentation related to the jackpot FF presentation (Part 1) corresponding to the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B).

As shown in Figure 8-52,
(1) Jackpot FF presentation (Part 1: first half): only concentrated lines are displayed (2) Jackpot FF presentation (Part 1: second half (1)): concentrated lines and the letter "B" are displayed (3) Jackpot FF presentation (Part 1: second half (2)): concentrated lines and the letter "BO" are displayed (4) Jackpot FF presentation (Part 1: second half (3)): concentrated lines and the letter "BON" are displayed (5) Jackpot FF presentation (Part 1: second half (4)): concentrated lines and the letter "BONU" are displayed (6) Jackpot FF presentation (Part 1: second half (5)): concentrated lines and the letter "BONUS" are displayed. That is, the first jackpot type notification image BP1 is displayed.

In this embodiment, in the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) corresponding to the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B), the 1A instruction image of the first instruction image is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5. The 1A instruction image is an image including a right-pointing arrow object and the words "hit right." The 1A instruction image is an animated video that moves from the left to the right of the screen of the image display device 5, and is eventually displayed so that the character "chi" of the "hit right" characters is off-screen (to the right of the screen).

<Jackpot C>
In this embodiment, in the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) corresponding to the jackpot C, a second jackpot type notification image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The second jackpot type notification image is an image including a convergent line and the words "Yume Yume Bonus." The jackpot FF presentation (part 1) corresponding to the jackpot C is composed of a first section and a second section (1) to (2), and is executed in the order of first section → second section (1) → second section (2). The first section and the second section (1) to (2) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) corresponding to the jackpot C have the presentation configuration shown below.

Figure 8-53 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the presentation image for each presentation related to the jackpot FF presentation (Part 1) corresponding to jackpot C.

As shown in Figure 8-53,
(1) Jackpot FF effect (Part 1: first half): Only concentrated lines are displayed. (2) Jackpot FF effect (Part 1: second half (1)): Concentrated lines and the word "Yume Yume" are displayed. (3) Jackpot FF effect (Part 1: second half (2)): Concentrated lines and the word "Yume Yume Bonus" are displayed. That is, the second jackpot type notification image BP2 is displayed.

In this embodiment, in the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) corresponding to jackpot C, the 1B instruction image of the first instruction image is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5. The 1B instruction image is an image including a right-pointing arrow object and the words "hit right." The 1B instruction image is an animated video that moves from the left to the right of the screen of the image display device 5, and is eventually displayed so that the character "chi" in the words "hit right" is completely off-screen (to the right of the screen). Note that the right-pointing arrow object and the image of the words "hit right" in the 1A instruction image move a longer distance and are displayed for a longer period of time than the right-pointing arrow object and the image of the words "hit right" in the 1B instruction image.

[Jackpot title display]
In this embodiment, the “BONUS” or “DREAM BONUS” in the jackpot type notification image (first jackpot type notification image, second jackpot type notification image) is referred to as a “jackpot title display.” This jackpot title display is composed of a first type character indicating a jackpot and a second type character indicating the type of the jackpot.

In this example, when the jackpot title display is "Yume Yume Bonus," the first type character is the character "BONUS" and the second type character is the character "Yume Yume." The first type character "BONUS" indicates that it is a jackpot, and the second type character "Yume Yume" is the name of the main character in the content tied up with this pachinko gaming machine 1, and indicates that this is the most advantageous type of jackpot for players who use this pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, when this jackpot title display is displayed, the player can recognize that it is the most advantageous jackpot.

Furthermore, the jackpot title display does not necessarily have to be composed of the first type character + second type character; the jackpot title display may be composed of only the first type character. For example, if the jackpot title display is "BONUS," the first type character is the character "BONUS," and no character is set as the second type character. In this case, the first type character "BONUS" alone indicates that there is a jackpot, so by indicating that there is a jackpot but not allowing the player to know which type of jackpot it is, the player can focus their attention on subsequent developments.

[First instruction image]
In this embodiment, the first instruction image (1A instruction image, 1B instruction image) is composed of instruction text information that uses text to indicate that the game is to be played by hitting with the right hand, and instruction graphic information that uses an object to indicate that the game is to be played by hitting with the right hand.

In this example, when the first instruction image is the 1A instruction image or the 1B instruction image, the instruction text information is the text "hit right" and the instruction graphic information is a right-pointing arrow object. Both the text information "hit right" and the instruction graphic information are indicative of playing by hitting right, so the playing method can be instructed from both the text information and the graphic information.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which instruction text information is superimposed on instruction graphic information in the first instruction image, but this is not limited to this form, and instruction text information does not have to be superimposed on instruction graphic information in the first instruction image.

[Example of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) FF effect]
Figure 8-54(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation image of each presentation related to the jackpot FF presentation of the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B). Figure 8-55 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each presentation related to the jackpot FF presentation of the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B).

First, as shown in Figure 8-54(A):(1), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol and sends a symbol confirmation command (Figure 8-55:T1), the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the decorative symbol combination (in this example, "333") that indicates a "jackpot" display result in the symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "333") corresponding to the decorative symbol is also fixed and stopped in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-54(A):(2), after the symbol determination period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the CPU 103 begins controlling the game state to the jackpot game state and sends a jackpot start command (Figure 8-55:T2), at which point the presentation control CPU 120 executes the jackpot FF presentation (Part 1). This figure shows the jackpot FF presentation (Part 1: latter part (5)) being executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-54(A):(3), when four seconds have elapsed since the start of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) (Figure 8-55:T3), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) and causes the image display device 5 to display the 1A instruction image IP1A. At this time, the 1A instruction image IP1A shows a state in which the "Right Hit" text and the right-pointing arrow object are all visible.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-54(A):(4), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) and causes the image display device 5 to display the first A instruction image IP1A (Figure 8-55:T4). At this time, the first A instruction image IP1A shows the character "chi" for "right hit" and the right part of the right-pointing arrow object in a state where they are difficult to see (cut off).

[Example of the jackpot C FF effect]
Figure 8-54(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation image of each presentation related to the jackpot FF presentation of the jackpot C. Figure 8-56 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each presentation related to the jackpot FF presentation of the jackpot C.

First, as shown in Figure 8-54(B):(1), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol and sends a symbol confirmation command (Figure 8-56:T1), the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") that indicates a "jackpot" display result in the symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") corresponding to the decorative symbol is also fixed and stopped in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-54(B):(2), after the symbol determination period (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the CPU 103 begins to control the game state to the jackpot game state, and when it sends a jackpot start command (Figure 8-56:T2), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the jackpot FF presentation (Part 1). This figure shows the jackpot FF presentation (Part 1: latter part (2)) being executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-54(B):(3), when two seconds have elapsed since the start of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) (Figure 8-56:T3), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) and causes the image display device 5 to display the 1B instruction image IP1B. At this time, the 1B instruction image IP1B shows the character "chi" in "right hit" and the right part of the right-pointing arrow object in a state where they are difficult to see (cut off).

[Right-hand mode: Example of error notification during jackpot FF effect]
(A) Jackpot FF presentation of the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B) Figure 8-57(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation image of each presentation related to the case where an error notification is executed during the jackpot FF presentation of the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B). Figure 8-58 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each presentation related to the case where an error notification is executed during the jackpot FF presentation of the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B).

First, as shown in Figure 8-57(A):(1), when the CPU 103 is controlling the gaming state to a jackpot gaming state and detects a ball-out error (Figure 8-58:T2A), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a ball-out error notification presentation and displays a first error image EP1 (in this example, an image containing the words "ball-out error") in the error image display area of the image display device 5.

At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the jackpot FF presentation (first part) and causes the image display device 5 to display the first jackpot type notification image BP1 (in this example, an image including a convergent line and the word "BONUS").

At this time, the display priority relationship between the first error image and the first jackpot type notification image is first jackpot type notification image < first error image, and the first error image is superimposed on the "US" in "BONUS" in the first jackpot type notification image.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-57(A):(2), if the out-of-ball error is not resolved and four seconds have passed since the jackpot FF presentation (Part 1) began (Figure 8-58:T3), the presentation control CPU 120 will continue to execute the out-of-ball error notification presentation and continue to display the first error image EP1 (in this example, an image containing the words "out-of-ball error") in the error image display area of the image display device 5.

At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) and causes the image display device 5 to display the first A instruction image IP1A (in this example, an image in which the entire text "Hit Right" is visible).

At this time, the display priority relationship between the first error image and the first A instruction image is first A instruction image < first error image, and the first error image is superimposed on the character "chi" in "right hit" in the first A instruction image and the right-pointing arrow object.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-57(A):(3), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the out-of-ball error notification presentation and continues to display the first error image EP1 (in this example, an image containing the words "out-of-ball error") in the error image display area of the image display device 5 (Figure 8-58: T4).

At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the jackpot FF presentation (part 2), and causes the image display device 5 to display the first A instruction image IP1A (in this example, an image in which the character "chi" in "right hit" is difficult to see).

At this time, the display priority relationship between the first error image and the first A instruction image is first A instruction image < first error image, and the first error image is superimposed on the three characters "hit right" and the right-pointing arrow object in the first A instruction image.

(B) Jackpot FF performance of jackpot C Figure 8-57(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image of each performance related to the case where an error notification is executed during the jackpot FF performance of jackpot C. Figure 8-59 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance related to the case where an error notification is executed during the jackpot FF performance of jackpot C.

First, as shown in Figure 8-57(B):(1), when the CPU 103 is controlling the gaming state to a jackpot gaming state and detects a ball-out error (Figure 8-59:T2A), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a ball-out error notification presentation and displays a first error image EP1 (in this example, an image containing the words "ball-out error") in the error image display area of the image display device 5.

At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the jackpot FF presentation (Part 1) and causes the image display device 5 to display the second jackpot type notification image BP2 (in this example, an image including a convergent line and the words "Yume Yume Bonus").

At this time, the display priority relationship between the first error image and the second jackpot type notification image is second jackpot type notification image < first error image, and the first error image is superimposed on the letters "Dream" and "S" in "Dream Dream Bonus" in the second jackpot type notification image.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-57(B):(2), if the out-of-ball error is not resolved and two seconds have passed since the jackpot FF presentation (Part 1) began (Figure 8-59:T3), the presentation control CPU 120 will continue to execute the out-of-ball error notification presentation and continue to display the first error image EP1 (in this example, an image containing the words "out-of-ball error") in the error image display area of the image display device 5.

At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) and causes the image display device 5 to display the 1B instruction image IP1B (in this example, an image in which the character "chi" in "right hit" is difficult to see).

At this time, the display priority relationship between the first error image and the first B instruction image is: first B instruction image < first error image, and the first error image is superimposed on the character "hit" in the "right hit" command in the first B instruction image and the right-pointing arrow object.

[Big Win Ending Theme]
In this embodiment, when a jackpot end command is received while the game is in a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot ED effect (jackpot ending effect) is executed. The jackpot ED effect is composed of a jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) that displays a total number of prize balls won screen (image) showing the total number of prize balls awarded, a jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) that notifies the player that the jackpot has ended and displays a screen (image) showing the type of right-hit mode that will be controlled after the jackpot, and a jackpot ED effect (part 2B) that displays a RUSH mode selection screen (image) for selecting the ST mode presentation mode.

<Jackpot A>
In this embodiment, the jackpot ED performance corresponding to jackpot A is composed of a jackpot ED performance (part 1A) and a jackpot ED performance (part 2A), and is executed in the order of jackpot ED performance (part 1A) → jackpot ED performance (part 2A).

(Big hit ED performance (Part 1A))
In this embodiment, in the jackpot ED presentation (part 1A) corresponding to jackpot A, a total prize ball image showing the total number of awarded prize balls is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The total prize ball image is an image including an indication of the total number of awarded prize balls in the jackpot (for example, the text "TOTAL: 00450 pt"), an addiction prevention image to prevent the player from becoming too addicted to pachinko games (for example, an icon including the text "Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation"), and a forget-to-remove prevention image to prevent the player from forgetting to remove the prepaid card containing the unused balance of the prepaid amount and the game balls in hand (for example, an icon including an object including "!" and the text "Please be careful not to forget to remove your card").

(Big hit ending performance (Part 2A))
In this embodiment, in the jackpot ED presentation (part 2A) corresponding to jackpot A, a time-saving entry image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, notifying the user that the jackpot has ended and indicating that the type of right-hit mode controlled after the jackpot is the time-saving mode. The time-saving entry image is an image including the words "Chance Time."

<Jackpot B>
In this embodiment, the jackpot ED presentation corresponding to jackpot B is composed of a jackpot ED presentation (part 1B), a jackpot ED presentation (part 2B), and a jackpot ED presentation (part 3B), and is executed in the order of jackpot ED presentation (part 1B) → jackpot ED presentation (part 2B) → jackpot ED presentation (part 3B).

(Big hit ED performance (Part 1B))
In this embodiment, in the jackpot ED presentation (part 1B) corresponding to jackpot B, a total prize ball image showing the total number of awarded prize balls is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The total prize ball image is an image including an indication of the total number of awarded prize balls in the jackpot (for example, the text "TOTAL: 01500 pt"), an addiction prevention image to prevent the player from becoming too addicted to pachinko games (for example, an icon including the text "Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation"), and a forget-to-remove prevention image to prevent the player from forgetting to remove the prepaid card containing the unused balance of the prepaid amount and the game balls in hand (for example, an icon including an object including "!" and the text "Please be careful not to forget to remove your card").

In this embodiment, during the jackpot ED presentation (part 2B) corresponding to jackpot B, a RUSH mode selection image (hereinafter referred to as the "ST mode selection image" or "presentation mode selection image" as appropriate) is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, allowing the user to select the ST mode presentation mode that will be controlled after the jackpot. The RUSH mode selection image includes a Yume Yume mode display corresponding to [Yume Yume Mode] (e.g., an image including character A and the text "Yume Yume Mode") on the left side of the image, a Nana mode display corresponding to [Nana Mode] (e.g., an image including character B and the text "Nana Mode") on the center side of the image, and a Jam mode display corresponding to [Jam Mode] (e.g., an image including character C and the text "Jam Mode") on the right side of the image. Hereinafter, the Yume Yume mode display, Nana mode display, and Jam mode display will be collectively referred to as the "mode display" as appropriate.

In addition, in the lower left corner of the RUSH mode selection image, an operation prompting display (for example, an image imitating push button 31B and an image including the words "Select mode with") is displayed to urge the player to operate the operation section (for example, push button 31B).
In this example, when the RUSH mode selection image is displayed, if the player operates the operation unit, the selected mode display will change. In the example of Figure 8-60(B):(2), the state in which the Dream mode display is selected is shown, and the other mode displays are not selected (in this example, the state in which the visibility is reduced by applying hatching processing).

(Big hit ending performance (Part 3B))
In this embodiment, in the jackpot ED presentation (part 3B) corresponding to jackpot B, an ST entry image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, notifying the player that the jackpot (first win) has ended and indicating that the game will be controlled to ST mode for the first time after the jackpot (first win). The ST entry image is an image containing the words "Powerful Rush Entry."

<Jackpot C>
In this embodiment, the jackpot ED performance corresponding to jackpot C is composed of a jackpot ED performance (part 1C) and a jackpot ED performance (part 2C), and is executed in the order of jackpot ED performance (part 1C) → jackpot ED performance (part 2C).

(Big hit ED production (Part 1C))
In this embodiment, in the jackpot ending effect (part 1C) corresponding to jackpot A, a total prize ball image showing the total number of awarded prize balls is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The total prize ball image is an image including an indication of the total number of awarded prize balls in the jackpots from the first jackpot to the current jackpot (for example, the text "TOTAL: 01950pt"), an addiction prevention image to prevent the player from becoming too addicted to pachinko games (in this example, an icon including the text "Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation"), and a forget-to-remove prevention image to prevent the player from forgetting to remove the prepaid card containing the unused balance of the prepaid amount and the game balls in hand (in this example, an icon including an object including "!" and the text "Please be careful not to forget to remove your card").

(Big hit ED production (Part 2C))
In this embodiment, in the jackpot ED presentation (part 2C) corresponding to jackpot C, an ST continuation image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the jackpot has ended and to indicate that control will be returned to ST mode after the jackpot. The ST continuation image is an image including the words "POWERFUL RUSH CONTINUED." However, in the time-saving mode, if the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is "jackpot" (jackpot C) and control is returned to ST mode after the jackpot, control will be returned to ST mode for the first time since the initial hit, so the ST continuation image is an image including the words "POWERFUL RUSH ENTERED."

[Example of jackpot ending effects]
(A) Jackpot ED performance of jackpot A Figure 8-60(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image of each performance related to the jackpot ED performance of jackpot A. Figure 8-61 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance related to the jackpot ED performance of jackpot A.

First, as shown in Figure 8-60(A):(1), when the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end command (Figure 8-61:T1), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the jackpot ED presentation (Part 1A) and displays a total prize ball image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The total prize ball image is an image that includes a total prize ball count display (in this example, the text "TOTAL: 00450pt"), an addiction prevention image PP1 (in this example, an icon containing the text "Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation"), and a forgetting to take your card prevention image PP2 (in this example, an icon containing an object containing an "!" and the text "Please be careful not to forget to take your card").

Here, the timing of Figure 8-61: T1 is the timing when the jackpot RD control for the final round in the jackpot round of the jackpot in question ends, i.e., the timing when the attacker closure control for the final round is executed. The same applies to the timing of Figure 8-62: T1 and Figure 8-64: T1, which will be described later, so their explanations will be omitted below.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-60(A):(2), when 4.5 seconds have passed since the start of the jackpot ending effect (part 1A) (Figure 8-61:T2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot ending effect (part 2A) and displays a time-saving entry image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The time-saving entry image is an image containing the words "Chance Time."

Next, when 4.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the jackpot ending presentation (part 2A) (Figure 8-61: T3), the presentation control CPU 120, based on the fact that the game mode has been controlled to time-saving mode, ends the jackpot ending presentation (part 2A) and causes the image display device 5 to display a presentation image related to time-saving mode (not shown).

(B) Jackpot ED performance of jackpot B Figure 8-60(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image of each performance related to the jackpot ED performance of jackpot B. Figure 8-62 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance related to the jackpot ED performance of jackpot B.

First, as shown in Figure 8-60(B):(1), when the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end command (Figure 8-62:T1), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the jackpot ED presentation (part 1B) and displays a total prize ball image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The total prize ball image is an image that includes a total prize ball count display (in this example, the text "TOTAL: 01500pt"), an addiction prevention image PP1 (in this example, an icon containing the text "Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation"), and a forgetting to take your card prevention image PP2 (in this example, an icon containing an object containing an exclamation mark and the text "Please be careful not to forget to take your card").

Next, as shown in Figure 8-60(B):(2), when 4.5 seconds have passed since the start of the jackpot ED presentation (part 1B) (Figure 8-62:T2), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the jackpot ED presentation (part 2B) and displays the RUSH mode selection image (in this example, an image including the Yume Yume mode display AMP, Nana mode display BMP, and Jam mode display CMP) on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the RUSH mode selection image shows that the Dream Dream mode display AMP has been selected based on the player's operation of the operation unit, and that the other Nana mode display BMP and Jam mode display CMP have not been selected (in this example, they have been hatched to reduce visibility).

Next, as shown in Figure 8-60(B):(3), when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the jackpot ED presentation (part 2B) (Figure 8-62:T3), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the jackpot ED presentation (part 3B) and displays an ST entry image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The ST entry image is an image containing the words "Powerful Rush Entry."

Next, when 4.5 seconds have passed since the start of the jackpot ED presentation (part 3B) (Figure 8-62: T4), the presentation control CPU 120, based on the fact that the game mode has been controlled to ST mode, ends the jackpot ED presentation (part 3B) and causes the image display device 5 to display a presentation image related to ST mode (not shown).

(C) Jackpot ED performance of jackpot C Figure 8-63(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image of each performance related to the jackpot ED performance of jackpot C. Figure 8-64 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance related to the jackpot ED performance of jackpot C.

First, as shown in Figure 8-63(C):(1), when the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end command (Figure 8-64:T1), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the jackpot ED presentation (part 1C) and displays a total prize ball image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The total prize ball image is an image that includes a total prize ball count display (in this example, the text "TOTAL: 01950pt"), an addiction prevention image PP1 (in this example, an icon containing the text "Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation"), and a forget-to-take-your-card prevention image PP2 (in this example, an icon containing an object containing an exclamation mark and the text "Please be careful not to forget to take your card").

Next, as shown in Figure 8-63(C):(2), when 4.5 seconds have passed since the start of the jackpot ED presentation (part 1C) (Figure 8-64:T2), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the jackpot ED presentation (part 2C) and displays an ST continuation image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The ST continuation image is an image containing the words "POWERFUL RUSH CONTINUED."

Next, when 3.5 seconds have passed since the start of the jackpot ED presentation (part 2C) (Figure 8-64: T3), the presentation control CPU 120, based on the fact that the game mode has been controlled to ST mode, ends the jackpot ED presentation (part 2C) and causes the image display device 5 to display a presentation image related to ST mode (not shown).

[Right-hand mode: Example of error notification during jackpot ending]
Figure 8-65 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation image of each presentation related to the case where an error notification is executed during the jackpot ED presentation of jackpot A. Figure 8-66 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each presentation related to the case where an error notification is executed during the jackpot ED presentation of jackpot A.

First, as shown in Figure 8-65, when a ball out error is detected while the jackpot ED performance (part 1A) is being executed (Figure 8-66: T1A), the performance control CPU 120 executes a ball out error notification performance and displays the first error image EP1 (in this example, an image including the words "ball out error") in the error image display area of the image display device 5.
The other effect images are the same as those shown in Figure 8-60(A):(1) above, so their explanation will be omitted.

At this time, the first error image EP1 is displayed in the error image display area (top right of the screen) of the image display device 5, the anti-slip image PP1 is displayed in the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, and the anti-forgetfulness image PP2 is displayed in the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5, so the display areas of each image do not overlap. Furthermore, the anti-slip image PP1 and the anti-forgetfulness image PP2 are displayed in larger display areas than the first error image EP1.

In this embodiment, the error image display area (top right of the screen) of the image display device 5 is set to be at eye level for a player of average height when sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 where the addiction prevention image PP1 is displayed and the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5 where the forgetting to take image PP2 is displayed are set to be slightly lower than eye level for a player of average height when sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[Jackpot RD performance]
In this embodiment, when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, a jackpot round start command is received, and jackpot RD control is started, and a jackpot RD presentation (jackpot round presentation) is executed. In the jackpot RD presentation, a background image for the jackpot RD is displayed, BGM for the jackpot RD is played, and a round display (1 ROUND, 2 ROUND, etc.) showing the current round number and a prize ball number display (00000 pt, 00015 pt, etc.) showing the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot round game are displayed.

<Acquisition award ball update performance>
In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big prize opening (attacker), a prize ball is awarded to the player. At this time, the big win RD effect can execute an acquired prize ball update effect that updates the prize ball count display, which is information related to the prize balls awarded to the player.

In the number of prize balls won presentation, when a game ball enters the large prize opening, the display mode of the number of prize balls is changed to an updated mode (a display mode in which the part corresponding to the updated digit is displaying a variable value), and a quadrant-shaped ripple effect display is displayed with its center at the bottom right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 (the position in the direction of the large prize opening relative to the image display device 5) (see Figure 8-67).

Then, 1.5 seconds after the start of the acquired prize ball update effect, the acquired prize ball update effect ends, the prize ball count display changes from the updated state to the updated value, and the ripple effect display disappears from the bottom right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

[Example of winning ball update effect]
8-67 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation image of each presentation related to the winning prize ball update presentation in the jackpot RD presentation. FIG. 8-68 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each presentation related to the winning prize ball update presentation in the jackpot RD presentation.

This example shows a situation in which, during the first round of a jackpot RD game, one game ball enters the big prize slot after no game balls have entered the big prize slot.

First, the presentation example in Figure 8-67 (1) is similar to the presentation example in Figure 8-30 (1), so we will omit the explanation.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-67 (2), when one game ball enters the large prize slot (Figure 8-68: T2), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the acquired prize ball update presentation, changes the display mode of the number of prize balls displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to an updated mode, and displays the ripple effect display WP.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-67 (3), when 1.5 seconds have passed since the start of the acquired prize ball update effect (Figure 8-68: T3), the effect control CPU 120 ends the acquired prize ball update effect, changes the number of prize balls displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to the updated value (in this example, "00015pt"), and erases the ripple effect display WP.

[First role, second role]
In this embodiment, the first and second reels are provided near (to the left, lower right, etc.) the image display device 5. The installation positions and movable status of the first and second reels are explained below with reference to Figures 8-69.

The first reel YM1 is a reel that does not operate from the first initial position (the position shown in Figures 8-69 (1) and (2)). On the other hand, the second reel YM2 is a reel that can operate between the second initial position (the position shown in Figure 8-69 (1)) and the operating position (the position shown in Figure 8-69 (2)) under the control of the performance control board 12.

As shown in Figures 8-69 (1) and (2), the first reel YM1 is installed to the left and in front of the image display device 5, and a portion (right portion) of the first reel YM1 is installed so that it overlaps the image display device 5, so the visibility of a portion (left portion) of the image display device 5 is reduced by the first reel YM1.

As shown in Figure 8-69 (1), the second reel YM2 is installed to the lower right and in front of the image display device 5. When the second reel YM2 is in its initial position, it is installed so that the entire second reel YM2 does not overlap with the image display device 5, so the visibility of the image display device 5 is not reduced by the second reel YM2. In other words, the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is not reduced by the second reel being in its initial position. In this figure, only a portion of the second reel YM2 (part of the head of character A) is displayed, but in reality, the entire second reel YM2 is visible.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 8-69 (2), when the second role device YM2 is in the operating position, a portion of the second role device YM2 (the head and upper body of character A) is placed so as to overlap the image display device 5, and therefore the visibility of a portion of the image display device 5 (the lower right portion) is reduced by the second role device YM2. In other words, the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is reduced by the second role device being in the operating position (the visibility of the lower portion of the 1A instruction image IP1A on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 is reduced).

For example, the second role YM2 may move from the initial position to the operating position to the initial position, or from the initial position to the operating position to the initial position to the operating position to the initial position, or from the initial position to a state between the initial position and the operating position (stopping) to the operating position to the initial position, or from the initial position to a state between the initial position and the operating position (stopping) to the initial position.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 8-69, when the second role YM2 is in its initial position, the second role YM2 is not located in front of the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the first role YM1 or the second role YM2 is moving from its initial position to its operating position, or when the second role YM2 is in its operating position, at least a portion of the first role YM1 or the second role YM2 is located in front of the image display device 5. In this case, the first role YM1 or the second role YM2 overlaps with the area of the image display device 5, affecting the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the second role device YM2 is in the operating position when the second part of the jackpot FF presentation (the right-hit instruction at the start of the jackpot) is executed or when the display result indicates a "jackpot" on the variable display, and the second role device YM2 is in the initial position at other times.

[Error notification on the jackpot type notification screen]
Figure 8-70 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation image of each presentation related to when an error notification is executed during the jackpot FF presentation (part 1).

The effect image of Figure 8-70(A) is similar to the effect image of Figure 8-57(B):(1) described above, so explanation will be omitted.
At this time, both the first role YM1 and the second role YM2 are in their initial positions (first initial position, second initial position).

In this way, when the first and second roles are installed and the jackpot FF presentation (Part 1) is executed, the visibility of part of the jackpot title display (in this example, the letters "Yume Yume Bonus") (in this example, the bottom left part of the letter "Yume" and the top left part of the letter "B") is reduced by the roles.

On the other hand, even when the first and second reels are installed, neither reel nor the second reels are installed in the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image is not reduced by the reels. Furthermore, the reels are installed and the error image display area is set so that the visibility of the error image is not reduced by the reels, regardless of the angle from which the player views the image display device 5.

[Error notification on normal right-hand stroke instruction screen]
Figure 8-70 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation image of each presentation related to when an error notification is executed during the jackpot FF presentation (part 2).

The effect image of Figure 8-70(B) is similar to the effect image of Figure 8-57(A):(3) described above, so explanation will be omitted.
At this time, the first role YM1 is in the initial position (first initial position), and the second role YM2 is in the operating position.

In this way, when the first and second role devices are installed and the jackpot FF presentation (second part) is executed, the role devices reduce the visibility of parts (in this example, the lower part of the right-pointing arrow object and the lower part of the character "hit") of the first instruction image (in this example, the right-pointing arrow object and the character "hit").

On the other hand, even when the first and second reels are installed, neither reel nor the second reels are installed in the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image is not reduced by the reels. Furthermore, the reels are installed and the error image display area is set so that the visibility of the error image is not reduced by the reels, regardless of the angle from which the player views the image display device 5.

[Example of a display when switching to normal mode after switching to time-saving mode]
Fig. 8-71 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display image of each display related to the case where the machine is controlled to the time-shortening mode and is then controlled to the normal mode without a jackpot occurring in the time-shortening mode. Fig. 8-72 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each display related to the case where the machine is controlled to the time-shortening mode and is then controlled to the normal mode without a jackpot occurring in the time-shortening mode.

In this example, we will illustrate a case where jackpot A occurs while the machine is in normal mode, the machine is switched to time-saving mode, and no new jackpot occurs during this time-saving mode, causing the machine to be switched back to normal mode.

First, we will omit the explanation of the parts of the image in Figure 8-71(1) that are similar to the image in Figure 8-54(A):(1) described above.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 confirms and stops the decorative symbol combination (in this example, "222") that indicates a "jackpot" display result in the symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "222") that corresponds to the decorative symbol is also confirmed and stopped in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5.

The presentation images in Figures 8-71 (2) to (4) are similar to the presentation images in Figure 8-54 (A): (2) and Figure 8-60 (A): (1) and (2) described above, so explanations will be omitted.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-71 (5), when the time-saving mode is in effect, the CPU 103 ends the display of the second special symbol variations (final variation in the time-saving mode) and sends a symbol confirmation command (Figure 8-72: T6), and the performance control CPU 120 confirms and stops the decorative symbol combination (in this example, "241") that indicates a "miss" display result in the symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "241") corresponding to the decorative symbol is also confirmed and stopped in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5.

At this time, based on the fact that this is the final change in the time-saving mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays the words "Chance Time" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a remaining time-saving count display (in this example, the words "0 times remaining") indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving mode is controlled (in this example, the words "0 times remaining") in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-71 (6), when 0.5 seconds of the pattern determination period has elapsed and control is switched from time-saving mode to normal mode (Figure 8-72: T7), the effect control CPU 120 executes the third operation method instruction effect and displays the third instruction image IP3 (in this example, an image including a left-pointing arrow object and the words "Hit Left") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the final decorative symbol combination (in this example, "241") of the time-saving final variation executed immediately before in the symbol display area of the image display device 5. The same applies to the small symbols.

[Example of a performance when the system is controlled to normal mode after transitioning to ST mode]
Fig. 8-73 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation image of each presentation related to the case where the machine is controlled to the ST mode and then controlled to the normal mode without a jackpot occurring in the ST mode. Fig. 8-74 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each presentation related to the case where the machine is controlled to the ST mode and then controlled to the normal mode without a jackpot occurring in the ST mode.

In this example, we will illustrate a case where jackpot B occurs while the machine is in normal mode, the machine is controlled to ST mode [Dream Dream Mode], and then the machine is controlled back to normal mode without another jackpot occurring during this ST mode.

The presentation images in Figures 8-71 (1) to (4) are similar to the presentation images in Figures 8-54 (A): (1), 8-54 (A): (2), and 8-60 (B): (1) and (3) described above, so further explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-73 (5), when controlled in ST mode, the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol (final variable of the time-saving mode), and at the timing (Figure 8-74: T6) when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern "High-speed C miss result display" (see Figure 8-7 (B): (1)) should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays a decorative symbol combination (in this example, "241") indicating that the display result will be "miss" in the symbol display area of the image display device 5. At this time, based on the continued variable display of the second special symbol, the small symbol variable display is continued in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5.

At this time, based on the fact that this is the final variation of ST mode [Dream Dream Mode], the performance control CPU 120 displays the words "Powerful Rush" in the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5, a performance mode icon indicating the current performance mode (in this example, an icon containing the words "Dream Dream Mode") in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, and a remaining ST count display indicating the remaining number of controls in ST mode (in this example, the words "0 remaining") in the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-73 (6), when controlled in ST mode, the CPU 103 is executing the second special symbol variation display (final time-saving variation), and at the timing (Figure 8-74: T7) when the result display for the variation pattern "High-speed C miss result display" (see Figure 8-7 (B): (1)) should begin, the performance control CPU 120 displays the result display RP (in this example, an image including the words "Powerful RUSH Ended" and "TOTAL: 01500pt") on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, based on the fact that the second special symbol variation display is continuing, the small symbol variation display is continuing to be executed in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-73 (7), when the CPU 103 ends the display of the second special symbol variation (final variation of the time-saving feature) and sends a symbol confirmation command (Figure 8-72: T8), the performance control CPU 120 confirms and stops the combination of small symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols (in this example, "241") in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 8-73 (8), when the 0.5 second pattern determination period has elapsed and control is switched from ST mode to normal mode (Figure 8-74: T9), the effect control CPU 120 executes the third operation method instruction effect and displays the third instruction image IP3 (in this example, an image including a left-pointing arrow object and the words "Hit Left") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the final decorative symbol combination (in this example, "241") of the time-saving final variation executed immediately before in the symbol display area of the image display device 5. The same applies to the small symbols.

(Effect 1)
As shown in Figure 8-19, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while an abnormal left-hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction is terminated, and as shown in Figure 8-21, even if a jackpot FF effect is executed while a ball-out error notification is being executed, the ball-out error notification continues to be executed.

With this configuration, by terminating the abnormal left-hand hit instruction that is currently being executed when the jackpot FF effect is being executed, when the jackpot game state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with a left-hand hit without interfering with the jackpot FF effect.

Furthermore, by continuing to execute the error notification that is being executed when the big win FF performance is executed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to a big win game state, and to perform a suitable error notification.
As a result, when the big win FF effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

(Effect 1-1)
As shown in the error notification display list table in Figure 8-8 (B), the following error notifications can be implemented: a first error notification display (out of balls error notification) that notifies the player that an out of balls error has occurred when an out of balls error occurs; a second error notification display (full tank error notification) that notifies the player that a full tank error has occurred when a full tank error has occurred; a third error notification display (door open error notification) that notifies the player that a door open error has occurred when a door open error has occurred; and a fourth error notification display (magnetic error notification) that notifies the player that a magnetic error has occurred when a magnetic error has occurred.

All of these error notifications will continue to be displayed even if a jackpot FF effect is executed.

With this configuration, regardless of which error occurs, the error notification continues when the jackpot FF effect is executed, making it easier for the player to recognize that an error has occurred.

(Effect 1-2)
As shown in the operation instruction effect list table in Figure 8-8 (A), the fifth operation instruction effect (abnormal left hit instruction) includes an abnormal left hit instruction (LV1: short) and an abnormal left hit instruction (LV2: long), which have different execution conditions (occurrence conditions) and execution periods. The execution period of the abnormal left hit instruction (LV1: short) is 5,000 ms, and the execution period of the abnormal left hit instruction (LV2: long) is 10,000 ms.

Also, as shown in Figures 8-9 and 8-10 (A), the execution condition for the abnormal left-hit instruction (LV1) is when the abnormal right-hit detection condition (LV1) is met, and the execution condition for the abnormal left-hit instruction (LV2) is when the abnormal right-hit detection condition (LV2) is met.

As shown in Figure 8-19, when either the abnormal left-hit instruction display (LV1) or the abnormal left-hit instruction display (LV2) is being executed and a jackpot FF display is executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction display that was being executed ends.

With this configuration, regardless of which abnormal left-hand hit instruction is being executed, once the jackpot FF effect is executed, the abnormal left-hand hit instruction that was being executed is terminated. This prevents the jackpot FF effect from being interrupted and prevents the player from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with a left-hand hit during the subsequent jackpot game state.

(Effects 1-3)
As shown in Figure 8-23, when an abnormal left-hit instruction and an error notification that were started during normal mode are being executed, if the game is controlled to a jackpot game state and a jackpot FF presentation is started, the abnormal left-hit instruction is terminated while the error notification continues to be executed.

Also, as shown in Figures 8-13 and 8-23, when an abnormal left hit instruction and an error notification are executed simultaneously, the error notification has a higher display priority than the abnormal left hit instruction, so it appears to the player to be displayed in front.

With this configuration, even if the abnormal left-hit instruction and error notification are executed simultaneously, the error notification has a higher priority than the abnormal left-hit instruction in terms of display priority and whether or not to execute it when a jackpot FF effect is executed, making it easier for the player to recognize that an error has occurred.

(Effects 1-4)
As shown in Fig. 8-8, the abnormal operation method instruction (abnormal left hit instruction, abnormal right hit instruction) is an effect executed using the effect devices of the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L, 8R. Also, as shown in Fig. 8-19, when the abnormal operation method instruction being executed is terminated due to the execution of the jackpot FF effect, both the display of the fifth instruction image on the image display device 5 and the playback output of the fifth instruction sound from the speakers 8L, 8R are terminated.

In addition, the jackpot FF sound (fanfare sound) is a sound that is emphasized more than other sound effects (normal mode sound effects, etc.). For example, the jackpot FF sound (fanfare sound) has a higher channel setting ratio than other sound effects. This increases the sense of specialness of the jackpot FF sound, and can increase the excitement of playing when a jackpot occurs.

With this configuration, when the jackpot FF effect is executed, the playback output of the instruction sound related to the abnormal operation method instruction is terminated, so the playback output of the jackpot FF effect sound is not interrupted, preventing a loss of interest in the jackpot.

(Effect 1-5)
As shown in Fig. 8-8, the error notification is an effect that is executed using the effect devices of the image display device 5 and the game effect lamp 9. Also, as shown in Fig. 8-21, when the error notification that is being executed is continued due to the execution of the jackpot FF effect, both the display of the first error image on the image display device 5 and the flashing red light of the game effect lamp 9 continue.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-25, even if the first error image is displayed on the image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1D, it is difficult for a store clerk to recognize from the first error image that an error has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine. On the other hand, if the game effect lamp 9 of the pachinko gaming machine 1D is flashing red, it becomes easy for a store clerk to recognize from the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 that an error has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine.

With this configuration, error notifications are given priority over jackpot FF effects when using the game effect lamp 9, making it easier for players and store staff to recognize that an error has occurred.

(Effect 1-6)
As explained in Figures 8-19, the display begins when the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives a command to specify the start of the jackpot, and continues until the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives a command to specify the end of the jackpot.

With this configuration, instruction images related to operation method instructions are displayed on the image display device 5 only at specific times, while the system right-hit image is always displayed on the image display device 5 while the device is controlled in right-hit mode, allowing the player to be accurately instructed on the operation method at any time.

(Effect 1-7)
As shown in Figure 8-54, in the jackpot FF presentation, a jackpot FF presentation (second part) is executed in which a first instruction image instructing a player to hit to the right is displayed, regardless of whether an abnormal left hit is detected or not. This jackpot FF presentation is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and is always executed when the jackpot FF presentation is executed, regardless of whether an abnormal left hit is detected or not.

With this configuration, even if an abnormal left hit is detected while a jackpot FF effect is being executed and a configuration is adopted in which an abnormal right hit instruction is not issued, the player can continue playing without being at a disadvantage in the subsequent jackpot RD game.

(Effect 2)
As shown in Figure 8-19, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while an abnormal left-hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction is terminated, and as shown in Figure 8-21, even if a jackpot FF effect is executed while a ball-out error notification is being executed, the ball-out error notification continues to be executed.

As shown in the abnormal operation method instruction presentation determination process in Figures 8-9, if the abnormal left-hit detection condition is met, an abnormal right-hit instruction can be executed (step S02TM1230: YES → proceed to step S02TM1250). Also, if the jackpot RD period or jackpot ED period occurs after the jackpot FF period has ended, an abnormal right-hit instruction can be executed (step S02TM1240: NO → proceed to step S02TM1250). Also, if the jackpot FF period occurs, the abnormal right-hit instruction is not executed (step S02TM1240: YES → skip the processing of step S02TM1250).

With this configuration, by terminating the abnormal left-hand hit instruction that is currently being executed when the jackpot FF effect is being executed, when the jackpot game state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with a left-hand hit without interfering with the jackpot FF effect.

In addition, by continuing to display the ongoing error notification when the jackpot FF effect is being executed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and appropriate error notification can be provided.

In addition, since the abnormal right hit instruction is executed after the big win FF performance is finished, even if the abnormal left hit detection condition is established during the big win FF performance, the big win FF performance is not disturbed and the decline in interest can be prevented by not executing the abnormal right hit instruction.
As a result, when the big win FF effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

(Effect 2-1)
As shown in Figures 8-9 and 8-10, if the abnormal left-hit detection condition is met during a period other than the jackpot FF period when controlled in right-hit mode, an abnormal right-hit instruction can be executed.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the abnormal left-hit detection condition and the abnormal right-hit detection condition were different, but this is not limited to this form, and the abnormal left-hit detection condition and the abnormal right-hit detection condition may be the same.

With this configuration, abnormal right-hit instructions can be executed during right-hit mode outside of the jackpot FF period, allowing appropriate notifications to be given to the player during right-hit mode outside of the jackpot FF period.

(Effect 2-2)
As shown in Figure 8-14, when the abnormal left-hit instruction performance (LV1) is executed, the image of the fifth instruction image IP5, which includes a left-pointing arrow object and the words "left-hit," is an image that is displayed twice, with display control repeating the process of framing in from the right edge of the screen of the image display device 5 and framing out toward the left edge of the screen.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-14, when the abnormal left-hit instruction effect (LV2) is executed, the image of the fifth instruction image IP5, which includes a left-pointing arrow object and the words "left-hit," is an image that is displayed four times in a manner that frames in from the right edge of the screen of the image display device 5 and frames out toward the left edge of the screen.

As shown in Figure 8-26, when the abnormal right-hit instruction effect is executed, the image of the fourth instruction image IP4, which includes a right-pointing arrow object and the words "right hit," is an image that is displayed twice, with display control repeating the process of framing in from the left edge of the screen of the image display device 5 and framing out toward the right edge of the screen.

(Effect 3)
As shown in Figure 8-19, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while an abnormal left-hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction is terminated.

In addition, as shown in Figures 8-38 and 8-40, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while the volume adjustment display or light intensity adjustment display is displayed, the volume adjustment display or light intensity adjustment display will continue to be displayed.

With this configuration, by ending the abnormal left-hand hit instruction that is currently being executed while the jackpot FF effect is being executed, when the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with a left-hand hit without interfering with the jackpot FF effect.

In addition, the volume adjustment display and light quantity adjustment display that are being displayed are continuously displayed when the big win FF performance is being executed, so that the volume adjustment display and light quantity adjustment display can be checked without interfering with the big win FF performance.
As a result, when the big win FF effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

(Effect 4)
As shown in FIG. 8-19, when the big win FF effect is executed while the fifth instruction sound is being reproduced and output, the reproduction and output of the fifth instruction sound is terminated.

As shown in Figures 8-38 and 8-40, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while volume adjustment audio or light intensity adjustment audio is being played back, the volume adjustment audio or light intensity adjustment audio continues to be played back.

With this configuration, by ending the playback output of the fifth instruction sound that is being played while the jackpot FF effect is being executed, when the jackpot game state is controlled, the jackpot FF effect is not interrupted and the player can be prevented from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with the left hand.

In addition, when the big win FF performance is being executed, the volume adjustment sound and light quantity adjustment sound being reproduced and outputted are continuously reproduced and outputted, so that the volume adjustment sound and light quantity adjustment sound can be confirmed without interfering with the big win FF performance, and the big win FF performance can be enjoyed with an appropriate volume and light quantity.
As a result, when the big win FF effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

(Effect 4-1)
As shown in FIGS. 8-33 and 8-36, the volume adjustment display and light intensity adjustment display are erased from the image display device 5 after five seconds have elapsed without accepting any operation of the volume adjustment button or light intensity adjustment button.

With this configuration, after checking the volume or light intensity, the volume adjustment display and light intensity adjustment display are hidden without any operation by the player, allowing the player to concentrate on playing the game without having to go through the trouble of erasing the volume adjustment display or light intensity adjustment display.

(Effect 4-2)
As described above, the volume adjustment sound may be a voice containing a sentence such as "The volume has been set to X," or a sound effect consisting of only sounds without sentences. Similarly, the light intensity adjustment sound may be a voice containing a sentence such as "The light intensity has been set to Y," or a sound effect consisting of only sounds without sentences.

This configuration allows for an increased variety of volume adjustment sounds and light intensity adjustment sounds, increasing the variety of times volume and light intensity adjustments can be performed.

(Effect 4-3)
As described above, by adopting the following effect control methods (X1) to (X3) for playing and outputting sound effects related to the volume adjustment effect and the light intensity adjustment effect, it is possible to simultaneously execute these effects in terms of sound effects. The effect that starts first is called the "first effect," and the effect that starts while the first effect is being executed is called the "second effect."
(X1) After the first sound effect has been played back to the end, the second sound effect is played back. (X2) The first sound effect is stopped and the second sound effect is played back. (X3) The second sound effect is played back while the first sound effect is being played back.

This configuration allows for smooth performance control even when volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment performances are executed simultaneously.

(Effect 4-4)
As shown in Figures 8-38 and 8-40, when volume adjustment sounds and light intensity adjustment sounds are played and output while controlled in the normal mode, the playback output priority of the normal mode effect sound is lowered compared to the volume adjustment sounds and light intensity adjustment sounds. On the other hand, when volume adjustment sounds and light intensity adjustment sounds are played and output while controlled in the right-hit mode (when the jackpot FF effect is being executed), the playback output priority of the jackpot FF effect sound is not lowered compared to the volume adjustment sounds and light intensity adjustment sounds.

With this configuration, the jackpot FF sound effect is a sound effect that celebrates the occurrence of a jackpot, so by not lowering the playback output priority below the volume adjustment sound and light intensity adjustment sound, it is possible to prevent players from becoming dissatisfied with the jackpot FF sound effect.

(Effect 5)
As shown in Figure 8-19, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while an abnormal left-hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction is terminated.

Also, as shown in Figure 8-45, if the jackpot FF effect is executed while the auto button OFF setting display is displayed, the auto button OFF setting display continues to be displayed, and as shown in Figure 8-47, if the jackpot FF effect is executed while the auto button ON setting display is displayed, the auto button ON setting display continues to be displayed.

With this configuration, by ending the abnormal left-hand hit instruction that is currently being executed while the jackpot FF effect is being executed, when the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with a left-hand hit without interfering with the jackpot FF effect.

In addition, the auto button OFF setting display or the auto button ON setting display being displayed continues to be displayed when the big win FF performance is being executed, so that it is possible to confirm whether the auto button OFF mode or the auto button ON mode is being controlled without interfering with the big win FF performance.
As a result, when the big win FF effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

(Effect 6)
As shown in FIG. 8-19, when the big win FF effect is executed while the fifth instruction sound is being reproduced and output, the reproduction and output of the fifth instruction sound is terminated.

Also, as shown in Figure 8-45, if the jackpot FF effect is executed while the auto button OFF setting sound is being played, the auto button OFF setting sound continues to be played, and as shown in Figure 8-47, if the jackpot FF effect is executed while the auto button ON setting sound is being played, the auto button ON setting sound continues to be played.

With this configuration, by ending the playback output of the fifth instruction sound that is being played while the jackpot FF effect is being executed, when the jackpot game state is controlled, the jackpot FF effect is not interrupted and the player can be prevented from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with the left hand.

In addition, when the big win FF performance is being executed, the auto button OFF setting sound or the auto button ON setting sound being played back and output is continuously played back and output, so that it is possible to confirm whether the auto button OFF mode or the auto button ON mode is being controlled without interfering with the big win FF performance.
As a result, when the big win FF effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

(Effect 6-1)
As shown in Figure 8-50, the volume adjustment display area capable of displaying a volume adjustment display related to the volume adjustment effect, the light adjustment display area capable of displaying a light adjustment display related to the light adjustment effect, and the auto button setting display area capable of displaying an auto button setting display related to the auto button setting effect are all different areas, so it is possible to display these images simultaneously.

This configuration allows for smooth effect control even when the volume adjustment effect, light intensity adjustment effect, and auto button setting effect are executed simultaneously.

(Effect 7)
As shown in Figure 8-57, when a ball-out error occurs while the jackpot title display (the letters "BONUS") is displayed, the first error image is superimposed on the jackpot title display, and the jackpot title display "BONUS" consists of two or more letters. The first error image is superimposed on the two letters "US" in the jackpot title display.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the jackpot title display is being displayed, an error image is superimposed on the jackpot title display, making it easier for players who were paying attention to the jackpot title display to recognize the error image, allowing them to continue playing smoothly after the error occurs.

(Effect 8)
As shown in Figure 8-57, when a ball out error occurs while the first A instruction image is displayed, the first error image is superimposed on the first A instruction image, and this first A instruction image "Right hit" is made up of three characters. The first error image is superimposed on the three characters "Right hit" in the first A instruction image.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the first A instruction image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the first A instruction image, making it easier for a player who has been paying attention to the first A instruction image to recognize the first error image, allowing the game to proceed smoothly after the error occurs.

(Effect 8-1)
As shown above, the jackpot title display (Yume Yume Bonus) is composed of a first type character (Bonus) indicating that it is a jackpot, and a second type character (Yume Yume) indicating the type of jackpot.

Figure 8-57 (B): As shown in (1), when an error image is displayed while the jackpot title display (Yume Yume Bonus) is being displayed, the error image is displayed superimposed on both the first type character (BONUS) and the second type character (Yume Yume) of the jackpot title display (Yume Yume Bonus).

Furthermore, the first instruction image (1A instruction image, 1B instruction image) is composed of instruction text information (the text "right-hand hit") that uses text to indicate that the game should be played with a right-hand hit, and instruction graphic information (a right-pointing arrow object) that uses an object to indicate that the game should be played with a right-hand hit.

As shown in Figures 8-57 (A) and (B), when an error image is displayed while a first instruction image (first A instruction image, first B instruction image) is being displayed, the error image is displayed superimposed on both the instruction character information (the characters "hit right") and the instruction graphic information (a right-pointing arrow object) of the first instruction image (first A instruction image, first B instruction image).

With this configuration, if an error occurs when the jackpot title display or the first instruction image is displayed, the error image is superimposed on each of the different types of information, allowing the player to focus on the error image regardless of which type of information they are focusing on.

(Effect 8-2)
In the above embodiment, the font of the characters used in the error image is different from the font of the characters used in images other than the error image (jackpot title display, operation method instruction image, volume adjustment display, light intensity adjustment display, auto button ON/OFF setting display, etc.). The font of the characters used in the error image is a simple, undecorated font, while the font of the characters used in images other than the error image (jackpot title display, operation method instruction image, volume adjustment display, light intensity adjustment display, auto button ON/OFF setting display, etc.) may be flashy and decorated.

With this configuration, the font used in the error image is different from the font used in images other than the error image, which draws attention to the error image and makes the error notification feel more special.

(Effect 9)
As shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball cut error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-slip image.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention image, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while also issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

(Effect 9-1)
8-65, the first error image EP1 is displayed in the error image display area (top right of the screen) of the image display device 5, the anti-slip image PP1 is displayed in the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, and the anti-forgetfulness image PP2 is displayed in the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5, so the display areas of each image do not overlap. Also, the anti-slip image PP1 and the anti-forgetfulness image PP2 are displayed in larger display areas than the first error image EP1.

This configuration ensures that sufficient space is available for the addiction prevention image, which requires a certain amount of text (in this example, an icon containing the text "Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation") and the forgetting to take card prevention image (in this example, an icon containing an object containing an exclamation mark and the text "Please be careful not to forget to take your card"), which require a certain amount of text.

(Effect 9-2)
As shown in Figure 8-65, the error image display area (top right of the screen) of the image display device 5 is set to be at eye level for a player of average height when sitting in front of the pachinko game machine 1 to play, and the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 where the addiction prevention image PP1 is displayed and the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5 where the forgetting to take image PP2 is displayed are set to be slightly lower than the eye level for a player of average height when sitting in front of the pachinko game machine 1 to play.

With this configuration, when an error image, a slip-in prevention image, and a forget-to-remove prevention image are displayed simultaneously, the error image can be more easily drawn to the viewer.

(Effect 10)
As shown in Figure 8-68, the acquired prize ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. Also, as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after the jackpot RD control of the final round is completed, the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) in which the total acquired prize ball image is displayed for 4.5 seconds is executed, and then the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) that notifies the end of the jackpot is executed. Therefore, the execution period of the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) is longer than the execution period of the acquired prize ball update effect (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds).

With this configuration, during the final round of jackpot RD control, after the prize ball update effect is executed to update the number of prize balls awarded based on a predetermined amount (10 in this example) of game balls entering the special variable prize ball device 7, images (time-saving entry image, ST entry image, ST continuation image) related to the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state are displayed, allowing the player to confirm the update to the number of prize balls awarded and preventing dissatisfaction with the update to the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game state.

(Effect 10-1)
As shown in Figure 8-68, the execution period of the winning prize ball update effect is 1.5 seconds, and as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, the execution period of the jackpot ED effect (Part 1A, Part 1B, Part 1C) after the jackpot RD control of the final round is completed is 4.5 seconds.

Here, even if an over-winning occurs when the jackpot RD control for the final round is ended, it is possible to execute (for 1.5 seconds) an acquired prize ball update effect corresponding to the predetermined number of game balls (10th ball) that entered the jackpot entry port, and execute (for 1.5 seconds) an acquired prize ball update effect corresponding to the over-winning amount of game balls (11th ball) that entered the jackpot entry port (1.5 seconds) from the timing when the jackpot RD control for the final round is ended (1.5 seconds + 1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds).

With this configuration, during the final round of jackpot RD control, a period of time can be secured to execute the acquired prize ball update effect corresponding to the predetermined number of game balls and the over-winning game balls. After the acquired prize ball update effect is executed, the display switches to images related to the jackpot ED effect (Part 2A, Part 3B, Part 2C) (time-saving entry image, ST entry image, ST continuation image), ensuring that the player can confirm the number of prize balls awarded and preventing dissatisfaction with jackpot RD gameplay.

(Effect 10-2)
As shown in Figure 8-67, in the number of prize balls won presentation, when a game ball enters the large prize opening, the display mode of the number of prize balls display is changed to an updated mode (a display mode in which the part corresponding to the updated digit is displaying a variable value), and a quadrant-shaped ripple effect display is displayed with its center at the bottom right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 (the position in the direction of the large prize opening relative to the image display device 5).

This configuration allows the player to focus on the updated number of winning balls displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, which is the direction in which the attacker is located when viewed from the image display device 5, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the jackpot RD game.

(Effect 10-3)
As shown in FIG. 8-68, the execution period of the acquired prize ball update effect is 1.5 seconds, and as shown in FIGS. 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, the execution period of the jackpot ED effect (parts 1A, 1B, and 1C) after the jackpot RD control of the final round is completed is 4.5 seconds. In this example, the execution period of the jackpot ED effect (parts 1A, 1B, and 1C) is three times the execution period of the acquired prize ball update effect. The execution period of the jackpot ED effect (parts 1A, 1B, and 1C) is not limited to this form, and may be twice or four times the execution period of the acquired prize ball update effect.

This configuration ensures that there is enough time to execute the acquired prize ball update effect during the final round of jackpot RD control, and after the acquired prize ball update effect is executed, the display switches to images related to the jackpot ED effects (Part 2A, Part 3B, Part 2C) (time-saving entry image, ST entry image, ST continuation image), ensuring that the player can confirm the number of prize balls awarded and preventing dissatisfaction with jackpot RD play.

(Effect 11)
As described above, the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hitting mode) are advantageous game states for players because the variable display of special symbols is more easily executed and the variable efficiency is improved compared to the normal state (left-hand hitting mode).

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

With this configuration, the variable display is more likely to be executed in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) than in the normal state, and the period from when a "jackpot" is detected as a result of the variable display of the special pattern to when the jackpot round begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of gameplay in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode).

(Effect 11-1)
As shown in Figure 8-54, the jackpot title display and first instruction image are different between the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) and the jackpot FF presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode).

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

With this configuration, the time-saving state and ST state (right-hit mode) make it easier for the variable display to be executed than in the normal state, and the period from when a "jackpot" is indicated as a result of the variable display of the special symbol to when the jackpot round play begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of play in the time-saving state and ST state (right-hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode). Furthermore, because the jackpot FF presentation differs depending on the jackpot, the excitement of the jackpot FF presentation can be increased.

(Effect 12)
As shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation for jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds and 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation for the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode), as shown in Figure 8-64.

With this configuration, the variable display is more likely to be executed in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) than in the normal state, and the period from the end of the final jackpot round play until the variable display of the special symbol can be executed (jackpot ED period) is shorter than in the normal state, which makes the speed of gameplay in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode).

(Effect 12-1)
As shown in Figures 8-60 and 8-62, the jackpot ED presentation corresponding to "jackpot B" that occurs in normal mode has a 10-second period to ensure a period for displaying a RUSH mode selection screen (image) for selecting the ST mode presentation mode, and a 4.5-second period to ensure a period for displaying an ST entry image indicating that control will be made to ST mode for the first time after the jackpot (first hit) (notifying that ST mode will be entered).

Also, as shown in Figures 8-63 and 8-64, in the jackpot ED presentation corresponding to "jackpot C" that occurs in right-hand hit mode, there is no period during which the RUSH mode selection screen (image) for selecting the ST mode presentation mode is displayed, and 3.5 seconds is provided to ensure a period during which the ST continuation image indicating that ST mode control will continue after the jackpot (notifying that ST mode will continue) is displayed.

With this configuration, when ST mode is entered for the first time upon the first win, the period for selecting RUSH mode and the period for displaying the ST entry image are ensured to be longer than when ST mode is continued, thereby further enhancing the excitement and sense of celebration when ST mode is entered for the first time.

(Effect 13)
As shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation for the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds, 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation for the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode), as shown in Figure 8-55.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-64, the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED effect of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

With this configuration, in the normal state, time-saving state, and ST state (right-hand hit mode), the period from when the final jackpot round play ends until the special symbol variable display becomes executable (jackpot ED period) is shorter than the period from when a "jackpot" is derived as a display result of the special symbol variable display until the jackpot round play begins (jackpot FF period). This shortens the period until control is exercised in the jackpot play state, and allows players to enjoy the lingering feeling when the jackpot play state ends for even longer.

(Effect 14)
As shown in Figure 8-4, "Jackpot A" is essentially a "normal jackpot" and a "3R jackpot" with 3 rounds, while "Jackpot B" is essentially a "special jackpot" and a "10R jackpot" with 10 rounds. Therefore, in terms of the presence or absence of special jackpot control and the number of rounds, Jackpot B is a more advantageous jackpot for the player than Jackpot A.

Also, as shown in Figure 8-55, the combined period of the pattern determination period and the execution period of the jackpot FF effect when jackpot A occurs, and the combined period of the pattern determination period and the execution period of the jackpot FF effect when jackpot B occurs, are both 7.5 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-61, the execution period of the jackpot ED effect for jackpot A (9 seconds) is longer than the execution period of the jackpot ED effect for jackpot B (19 seconds), as shown in Figure 8-62.

With this configuration, the combined period of the symbol determination period and the jackpot FF performance execution period is the same for jackpot A and jackpot B, so regardless of which jackpot gaming state is controlled to, a period of time can be secured to perform the same celebration before being controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the execution period of the jackpot ED presentation is set to be longer for jackpot B than for jackpot A, allowing players to enjoy the afterglow of being controlled by jackpot B even more.

(Effect 14-1)
As shown in Figures 8-60 and 8-61, in the jackpot ED presentation corresponding to "jackpot A" that occurs in normal mode, there is no period during which the RUSH mode selection screen (image) for selecting the ST mode presentation mode is displayed, and there is a 4.5 second period during which a time-saving entry image indicating that the game will be controlled to time-saving mode after the jackpot (first hit) (notifying the player that the game will enter time-saving mode) is displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 8-60 and 8-62, the jackpot ED presentation corresponding to "jackpot B" that occurs in normal mode has a 10-second period during which the RUSH mode selection screen (image) for selecting the ST mode presentation mode is displayed, and a 4.5-second period during which the ST entry image is displayed, indicating that control will be made to ST mode for the first time after the jackpot (first win) (notifying players that they will enter ST mode).

With this configuration, when ST mode is entered for the first time upon a first win, the period for selecting RUSH mode and the period for displaying the ST entry image are ensured to be longer than when ST mode is not entered, thereby further increasing the excitement and sense of celebration when ST mode is entered for the first time.

(Effect 15)
As shown in Figure 8-54, in the jackpot FF presentation, the jackpot FF presentation (part 1): jackpot title display ("BONUS", "Yume Yume Bonus") and the jackpot FF presentation (part 2): first instruction image (1A instruction image, 1B instruction image) instructing the player to hit right during jackpot play are displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (4 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) of jackpot A and jackpot B is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) of jackpot A and jackpot B. Similarly, as shown in Figure 8-56, the execution period (2 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) of jackpot C is longer than the execution period (1.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) of jackpot C.

With this configuration, by making the period during which the jackpot title display is displayed longer than the period during which the first instruction image is displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the jackpot title display and emphasize to the player that they are being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, by displaying the first instruction image after the jackpot title display has finished, players who were paying attention to the jackpot title display can continue to focus on the first instruction image.

(Effect 15-1)
As shown in Figure 8-55, when the jackpot FF effects corresponding to jackpot A and jackpot B are executed, the relationship is as follows: pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) < jackpot FF effect (part 2) (3 seconds) < jackpot FF effect (part 1) (4 seconds).

Similarly, as shown in Figure 8-56, when the jackpot FF effect corresponding to jackpot C is executed, the relationship is: pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) < jackpot FF effect (part 2) (1.5 seconds) < jackpot FF effect (part 1) (2 seconds).

With this configuration, the jackpot FF presentation (Part 1), in which the jackpot title display is displayed, has the longest execution period, allowing players to reliably recognize the jackpot title.

(Effect 15-2)
In the above embodiment,
Pattern determination period: The period from when the decorative pattern is determined and stopped to when the jackpot title display starts (jackpot FF performance (Part 1: first half): only the concentration line is displayed),
Execution period of the jackpot FF performance (part 1): The period from the start of the display of the jackpot title display to the start of the display of the first instruction image,
Execution period of the big hit FF performance (part 2): The period from when the first instruction image starts to be displayed until the attacker is opened,
It shall be stipulated that:

This configuration allows for accurate definition of the time period from when the display of the special symbol that represents a jackpot finishes changing to when the jackpot FF performance is executed and the attacker opens, thereby increasing the excitement when the jackpot FF performance is executed.

(Effect 16)
As shown in Figure 8-54 (A), in the jackpot FF presentation for the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B), the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) displays a jackpot title display ("BONUS") and the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) displays a first instruction image (1A instruction image) instructing the player to hit right during jackpot play, and as shown in Figure 8-54 (B), the presentation control CPU 120 displays a jackpot FF presentation (part 1) displays a jackpot title display ("Yume Yume Bonus") and the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) displays a first instruction image (1B instruction image, etc.) instructing the player to hit right during jackpot play in the jackpot FF presentation for jackpot C.

Also, as shown in Figure 8-55, for the first hit (Jackpot A, Jackpot B), the execution period of the Jackpot FF presentation (Part 1) (4 seconds) is longer than the execution period of the Jackpot FF presentation (Part 2) (3 seconds). Also, as shown in Figure 8-56, for Jackpot C, the execution period of the Jackpot FF presentation (Part 1) (2 seconds) is longer than the execution period of the Jackpot FF presentation (Part 2) (1.5 seconds).

With this configuration, when the game is controlled to at least one of the normal state, time-saving state, or ST state, the period during which the jackpot title display is displayed is made longer than the period during which the first instruction image is displayed, thereby drawing the player's attention to the jackpot title display and emphasizing to the player that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state.

In addition, by displaying the first instruction image after the jackpot title display has finished, players who were paying attention to the jackpot title display can continue to focus on the first instruction image.

(Effect 16-1)
As shown in Figures 8-54 (A) and (B), the presentation mode of the jackpot FF presentation corresponding to the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) is different from the presentation mode of the jackpot FF presentation corresponding to jackpot C.

With this configuration, the jackpot FF presentation differs depending on the game mode in which the jackpot occurs, increasing the excitement of jackpot play.

(Effect 17)
As shown in Figure 8-70 (A), when the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) is executed with the reels (first reel and second reel) installed, the visibility of the lower left part of the character "Yume" and the upper left part of the character "B" in the jackpot title display "Yume Yume Bonus" is reduced by the reels.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-70 (A), even when the reels (first reel, second reel) are installed, none of the reels are installed in the error image display area (top right of the screen) of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image (first error image) is not reduced by the reels.

With this configuration, the reels are positioned so that they overlap the image display device 5, drawing the player's attention to the image display device 5 and the reels when the effects are being executed. Furthermore, part of the jackpot title display, which celebrates the game entering a jackpot game state, is displayed in a position and size that reduces its visibility due to the reels, making it more impressive to the player when the game enters a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, since the error image needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, it is displayed in a position and size that does not reduce visibility due to the reels, allowing the player to be accurately notified that an error has occurred.

(Effect 17-1)
As shown in Figure 8-53 (B): (3), in the jackpot title display in the jackpot FF presentation corresponding to jackpot C, an image including the words "Yume Yume Bonus" is displayed, and at this time, part of the words "Yume Yume Bonus" (the upper part of the screen) is displayed in a state where it is cut off from the screen of the image display device 5 (making it difficult to see).

Furthermore, without being limited to the above embodiment, the portion where the text of the jackpot title display (such as "Yume Yume Bonus") is cut off may be the left portion of the screen, the right portion of the screen, the bottom portion of the screen, or multiple portions of these.

With this configuration, the jackpot title display can further emphasize the special feeling of hitting a jackpot, increasing the excitement of jackpot play.

(Effect 17-2)
As shown in Figure 8-54, both the instruction character information (the characters "hit right") and the instruction graphic information (a right-pointing arrow object) of the first instruction image are displayed in a state where they are cut off from the screen of the image display device 5 (making them difficult to see).

Similarly, both the first type of characters (the characters "BONUS") and the second type of characters ("Yume Yume") of the jackpot title display may be displayed in a position or size that causes them to be cut off from the screen of the image display device 5 (making them difficult to see).
For example, the display position and size may be such that the letter "B" in the first type of characters (the letters "BONUS") in the jackpot title display and the first letter "Yume" in the second type of characters ("Yume Yume") are cut off from the left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the letter "S" in the first type of characters (the letters "BONUS") in the jackpot title display and the second letter "Yume" in the second type of characters ("Yume Yume") are cut off from the right part of the screen of the image display device 5.

With this configuration, the jackpot title display can further emphasize the special feeling of hitting a jackpot, increasing the excitement of jackpot play.

(Effect 18)
As shown in Figure 8-70 (B), when the jackpot FF performance (second part) is executed with the reels (first reel, second reel) installed, the visibility of part (the lower part of the right-pointing arrow object and the lower part of the character "hit") of the first instruction image (in this example, the right-pointing arrow object and the character "hit") is reduced by the reels.

As shown in Figure 8-70 (B), even when the reels (first reel, second reel) are installed, none of the reels are installed in the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image (first error image) is not reduced by the reels.

With this configuration, the reel is positioned so that it overlaps with the image display device 5, drawing the player's attention to the image display device 5 and the reel when the effects are being executed. Part of the first instruction image, which suggests how to operate the machine in a jackpot game state, is displayed in a position and size that reduces its visibility due to the reel, allowing the player to be controlled into a jackpot game state and making a stronger impression when the first instruction image is displayed.

On the other hand, since the error image needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, it is displayed in a position and size that does not reduce visibility due to the reels, allowing the player to be accurately notified that an error has occurred.

(Effect 18-1)
As shown in Figure 8-54(A):(4), the right part of the character "Right Hit" (the character "chi") and the right part of the right-pointing arrow object (the arrow part) in the first A instruction image are displayed in a state where they are difficult to see (cut off). Also, as shown in Figure 8-54(B):(3), the right part of the character "Right Hit" (the character "chi") and the right part of the right-pointing arrow object (the arrow part) in the first B instruction image IP1B are displayed in a state where they are difficult to see (cut off).

With this configuration, by displaying a portion of the first instruction image (the right side in this example) in a manner that makes it difficult to see, it is possible to increase the interest when instructing how to play in a jackpot game, and by not displaying a portion of the first instruction image (the left side in this example) in a manner that makes it difficult to see, it is possible to accurately instruct how to play in a jackpot game.

(Effect 19)
As shown in Figure 8-73, when the first hit occurs and the machine is controlled to the ST state, when the ST state ends without a new jackpot occurring in the ST state and the machine is controlled to the normal state, a result display is displayed that includes information related to the number of prize balls awarded to the player and the number of jackpots.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 8-71, when an initial hit occurs and the game is controlled to the time-saving mode, if the time-saving mode ends without a new jackpot occurring during the time-saving mode and the game is controlled to the normal mode, the result display does not include information related to the number of prize balls awarded to the player or the number of jackpots.

With this configuration, if the game is not controlled to the ST state (if the game is controlled to the time-saving state), the result display is not displayed, and the player is not notified of information (such as information regarding the total number of prize balls won) that would have been awarded if the game had been controlled to the ST state, in which a jackpot is more likely to occur than in the time-saving state, and this prevents the player from feeling depressed or stressed.

(Effect 19-1)
As shown in Figure 8-63, in the jackpot C jackpot ending performance, the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpots from the first jackpot to the jackpot in question is displayed. This can also be said to be a result display of the number of prize balls awarded from the first jackpot to the jackpot in question.

With this configuration, when a jackpot occurs while the machine is controlled in right-hand mode, a result display can be displayed each time a jackpot occurs, increasing the opportunities to notify the player of the number of prize balls awarded.

(Effect 19-2)
As shown in Figure 8-4, when an initial hit occurs and the game is controlled to the time-saving mode, when the time-saving mode ends without a new jackpot occurring in the time-saving mode and the game is controlled to the normal mode, the balls finally awarded to the player are "jackpot A" at the time of the initial hit, which is 450. Also, when an initial hit occurs and the game is controlled to the ST mode, when the ST mode ends without a new jackpot occurring in the ST mode and the game is controlled to the normal mode, the balls finally awarded to the player are "jackpot B" at the time of the initial hit, which is 1500.

Therefore, when an initial hit occurs and the game is controlled to the time-saving mode, the number of balls ultimately awarded to the player when the time-saving mode ends without a new jackpot occurring in the time-saving mode and the game is controlled to the normal mode will be less than half of the number of balls ultimately awarded to the player when an initial hit occurs and the game is controlled to the ST mode and the ST mode ends without a new jackpot occurring in the ST mode and the game is controlled to the normal mode.

This configuration further improves the effectiveness of not displaying the result display when an initial hit occurs and the game is controlled to the time-saving mode, and the time-saving mode ends without a new jackpot occurring during the time-saving mode and the game is controlled to the normal mode.

(Effect 20)
As shown in Figure 8-19, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while an abnormal left-hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction is terminated, and as shown in Figure 8-21, even if a jackpot FF effect is executed while a ball-out error notification is being executed, the ball-out error notification continues to be executed.

Also, as shown in Figure 8-57, if a ball-out error occurs while the jackpot title display (the letters "BONUS") is displayed, the first error image is superimposed on the jackpot title display, which consists of two or more letters, "BONUS." The first error image is superimposed on the two letters "US" in the jackpot title display.

With this configuration, by terminating the abnormal left-hand hit instruction that is currently being executed when the jackpot FF effect is being executed, when the jackpot game state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with a left-hand hit without interfering with the jackpot FF effect.

Furthermore, by continuing to execute the error notification that is being executed when the big win FF performance is executed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to a big win game state, and to perform a suitable error notification.
As a result, when the big win FF effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

In addition, if an error occurs while the jackpot title display is being displayed, an error image is superimposed on the jackpot title display, making it easier for players who were paying attention to the jackpot title display to recognize the error image, allowing them to continue playing smoothly after the error occurs.

(Effect 21)
As shown in Figure 8-19, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while an abnormal left-hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction is terminated, and as shown in Figure 8-21, even if a jackpot FF effect is executed while a ball-out error notification is being executed, the ball-out error notification continues to be executed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-57, if a ball-out error occurs while the first A instruction image is displayed, the first error image is superimposed on the first A instruction image, and this first A instruction image "Right hit" is composed of three characters. The first error image is superimposed on the three characters "Right hit" in the first A instruction image.

With this configuration, by terminating the abnormal left-hand hit instruction that is currently being executed when the jackpot FF effect is being executed, when the jackpot game state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with a left-hand hit without interfering with the jackpot FF effect.

Furthermore, by continuing to execute the error notification that is being executed when the big win FF performance is executed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to a big win game state, and to perform a suitable error notification.
As a result, when the big win FF effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

In addition, if an error occurs while the first A instruction image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the first A instruction image, making it easier for players who have been paying attention to the first A instruction image to recognize the first error image, allowing gameplay to proceed smoothly after the error occurs.

(Effect 22)
As shown in Figure 8-19, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while an abnormal left-hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction is terminated, and as shown in Figure 8-21, even if a jackpot FF effect is executed while a ball-out error notification is being executed, the ball-out error notification continues to be executed.

As shown in Figure 8-65, if a bulb cut error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-slip image.

With this configuration, by terminating the abnormal left-hand hit instruction that is currently being executed when the jackpot FF effect is being executed, when the jackpot game state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with a left-hand hit without interfering with the jackpot FF effect.

Furthermore, by continuing to execute the error notification that is being executed when the big win FF performance is executed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to a big win game state, and to perform a suitable error notification.
As a result, when the big win FF effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

In addition, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention image, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while also issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

(Effect 23)
As shown in Figure 8-19, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while an abnormal left-hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction is terminated, and as shown in Figure 8-21, even if a jackpot FF effect is executed while a ball-out error notification is being executed, the ball-out error notification continues to be executed.

Also, as shown in Figure 8-68, the acquired prize ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. Also, as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after the jackpot RD control for the final round ends, a jackpot ED effect (Part 1A, Part 1B, Part 1C) is executed in which an image of the total acquired prize balls is displayed for 4.5 seconds, followed by a jackpot ED effect (Part 2A, Part 3B, Part 2C) that notifies the user that the jackpot has ended. Therefore, the execution period of the jackpot ED effect (Part 1A, Part 1B, Part 1C) is longer than the execution period of the acquired prize ball update effect (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds).

With this configuration, by terminating the abnormal left-hand hit instruction that is currently being executed when the jackpot FF effect is being executed, when the jackpot game state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with a left-hand hit without interfering with the jackpot FF effect.

Furthermore, by continuing to execute the error notification that is being executed when the big win FF performance is executed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to a big win game state, and to perform a suitable error notification.
As a result, when the big win FF effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

In addition, during the final round of jackpot RD control, after the prize ball update effect is executed to update the number of prize balls awarded based on a predetermined amount (10 in this example) of game balls entering the special variable prize ball device 7, images (time-saving entry image, ST entry image, ST continuation image) related to the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state are displayed, allowing the player to confirm the update to the number of prize balls awarded, preventing dissatisfaction with the update to the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game state.

(Effect 24)
As shown in Figure 8-19, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while an abnormal left-hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction is terminated, and as shown in Figure 8-21, even if a jackpot FF effect is executed while a ball-out error notification is being executed, the ball-out error notification continues to be executed.

As mentioned above, the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode) are advantageous game states for players because they make it easier for special symbol variations to be displayed and improve variation efficiency compared to the normal state (left-hand hit mode).

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

With this configuration, by terminating the abnormal left-hand hit instruction that is currently being executed when the jackpot FF effect is being executed, when the jackpot game state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with a left-hand hit without interfering with the jackpot FF effect.

Furthermore, by continuing to execute the error notification that is being executed when the big win FF performance is executed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to a big win game state, and to perform a suitable error notification.
As a result, when the big win FF effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

In addition, in the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode), the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the period from when a "jackpot" is indicated as a result of the variable display of the special pattern to when the jackpot round play begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of play in the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hand hit mode).

(Effect 25)
As shown in Figure 8-19, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while an abnormal left-hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction is terminated, and as shown in Figure 8-21, even if a jackpot FF effect is executed while a ball-out error notification is being executed, the ball-out error notification continues to be executed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED effect for jackpot C, which occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds and 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED effect for the first jackpot (jackpot A and jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode), as shown in Figure 8-64.

With this configuration, by terminating the abnormal left-hand hit instruction that is currently being executed when the jackpot FF effect is being executed, when the jackpot game state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with a left-hand hit without interfering with the jackpot FF effect.

Furthermore, by continuing to execute the error notification that is being executed when the big win FF performance is executed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to a big win game state, and to perform a suitable error notification.
As a result, when the big win FF effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

With this configuration, the variable display is more likely to be executed in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) than in the normal state, and the period from the end of the final jackpot round play until the variable display of the special symbol can be executed (jackpot ED period) is shorter than in the normal state, which makes the speed of gameplay in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode).

(Effect 26)
As shown in Figure 8-19, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while an abnormal left-hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction is terminated, and as shown in Figure 8-21, even if a jackpot FF effect is executed while a ball-out error notification is being executed, the ball-out error notification continues to be executed.

As shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation for the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds, 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation for the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode), as shown in Figure 8-55.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-64, the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED effect of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot ED effect of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

With this configuration, by terminating the abnormal left-hand hit instruction that is currently being executed when the jackpot FF effect is being executed, when the jackpot game state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with a left-hand hit without interfering with the jackpot FF effect.

Furthermore, by continuing to execute the error notification that is being executed when the big win FF performance is executed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to a big win game state, and to perform a suitable error notification.
As a result, when the big win FF effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

In addition, in the normal state, time-saving state, and ST state (right-hand hit mode), the period from when a "jackpot" is derived as a result of the display of the special symbol variation to when the jackpot round play begins (jackpot FF period) is shorter than the period from when the final jackpot round play ends to when the special symbol variation display can be executed (jackpot ED period). This shortens the period until control is exercised in the jackpot play state, and allows the player to enjoy the lingering feeling when the jackpot play state ends for even longer.

(Effect 27)
As shown in Figure 8-19, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while an abnormal left-hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction is terminated, and as shown in Figure 8-21, even if a jackpot FF effect is executed while a ball-out error notification is being executed, the ball-out error notification continues to be executed.

Also, as shown in Figure 8-54, in the jackpot FF presentation, the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) displays the jackpot title ("BONUS", "Yume Yume Bonus"), and the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) displays the first instruction image (1A instruction image, 1B instruction image) that instructs the player to hit the right during jackpot play.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (4 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) of jackpot A and jackpot B is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) of jackpot A and jackpot B. Similarly, as shown in Figure 8-56, the execution period (2 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) of jackpot C is longer than the execution period (1.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) of jackpot C.

With this configuration, by terminating the abnormal left-hand hit instruction that is currently being executed when the jackpot FF effect is being executed, when the jackpot game state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with a left-hand hit without interfering with the jackpot FF effect.

Furthermore, by continuing to execute the error notification that is being executed when the big win FF performance is executed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to a big win game state, and to perform a suitable error notification.
As a result, when the big win FF effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, by making the period during which the jackpot title display is displayed longer than the period during which the first instruction image is displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the jackpot title display, emphasizing to the player that they are being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, by displaying the first instruction image after the jackpot title display has finished, players who were paying attention to the jackpot title display can continue to focus on the first instruction image.

(Effect 28)
As shown in Figure 8-19, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while an abnormal left-hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction is terminated, and as shown in Figure 8-21, even if a jackpot FF effect is executed while a ball-out error notification is being executed, the ball-out error notification continues to be executed.

As shown in Figure 8-70 (A), when the jackpot FF performance (Part 1) is executed with the reels (First Reel, Second Reel) installed, the visibility of the bottom left part of the character "Yume" and the top left part of the character "B" in the jackpot title display "Yume Yume Bonus" is reduced by the reels.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-70 (A), even when the reels (first reel, second reel) are installed, none of the reels are installed in the error image display area (top right of the screen) of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image (first error image) is not reduced by the reels.

With this configuration, by terminating the abnormal left-hand hit instruction that is currently being executed when the jackpot FF effect is being executed, when the jackpot game state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with a left-hand hit without interfering with the jackpot FF effect.

Furthermore, by continuing to execute the error notification that is being executed when the big win FF performance is executed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to a big win game state, and to perform a suitable error notification.
As a result, when the big win FF effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

In addition, by positioning the reels so that they overlap the image display device 5, the player can be drawn to the image display device 5 and the reels when the effects are being executed, and by displaying part of the jackpot title display, which celebrates the game being controlled to a jackpot game state, in a position and size that reduces its visibility due to the reels, the player can be made to feel more strongly when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, since the error image needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, it is displayed in a position and size that does not reduce visibility due to the reels, allowing the player to be accurately notified that an error has occurred.

(Effect 29)
As shown in Figure 8-19, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while an abnormal left-hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction is terminated, and as shown in Figure 8-21, even if a jackpot FF effect is executed while a ball-out error notification is being executed, the ball-out error notification continues to be executed.

As shown in Figure 8-70 (B), when the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) is executed with the reels (first reel and second reel) installed, the visibility of part (the bottom part of the right-pointing arrow object and the bottom part of the character "hit") of the first instruction image (in this example, the right-pointing arrow object and the character "hit") is reduced by the reels.

As shown in Figure 8-70 (B), even when the reels (first reel, second reel) are installed, none of the reels are installed in the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image (first error image) is not reduced by the reels.

With this configuration, by terminating the abnormal left-hand hit instruction that is currently being executed when the jackpot FF effect is being executed, when the jackpot game state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the ball-hitting control handle 30 with a left-hand hit without interfering with the jackpot FF effect.

Furthermore, by continuing to execute the error notification that is being executed when the big win FF performance is executed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to a big win game state, and to perform a suitable error notification.
As a result, when the big win FF effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

In addition, by positioning the reel so that it overlaps with the image display device 5, the player can be drawn to the image display device 5 and the reel when the effects are being executed, and part of the first instruction image suggesting the operation method in the jackpot game state is displayed in a position and size that reduces its visibility due to the reel, which allows the player to be controlled into the jackpot game state and makes a stronger impression when the first instruction image is displayed.

On the other hand, since the error image needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, it is displayed in a position and size that does not reduce visibility due to the reels, allowing the player to be accurately notified that an error has occurred.

(Effect 30)
As shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball cut error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-slip image.

As shown in Figure 8-57, if a ball-out error occurs while the jackpot title display (the letters "BONUS") is displayed, the first error image is superimposed on the jackpot title display, which consists of two or more letters, "BONUS." The first error image is superimposed on the two letters "US" in the jackpot title display.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention image, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while also issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

In addition, if an error occurs while the jackpot title display is being displayed, an error image is superimposed on the jackpot title display, making it easier for players who were paying attention to the jackpot title display to recognize the error image, allowing them to continue playing smoothly after the error occurs.

(Effect 31)
As shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball-out error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-slip image.

As shown in Figure 8-57, if a ball-out error occurs while the first A instruction image is displayed, the first error image is superimposed on the first A instruction image, which consists of three characters: "Right hit." The first error image is superimposed on the three characters "Right hit" in the first A instruction image.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention image, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while also issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

In addition, if an error occurs while the first A instruction image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the first A instruction image, making it easier for players who have been paying attention to the first A instruction image to recognize the first error image, allowing gameplay to proceed smoothly after the error occurs.

(Effect 32)
As shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball cut error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-slip image.

As shown in Figure 8-68, the acquired prize ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. Also, as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after the jackpot RD control for the final round ends, a jackpot ED effect (Part 1A, Part 1B, Part 1C) is executed in which an image of the total acquired prize balls is displayed for 4.5 seconds, followed by a jackpot ED effect (Part 2A, Part 3B, Part 2C) that notifies the player that the jackpot has ended. Therefore, the execution period of the jackpot ED effect (Part 1A, Part 1B, Part 1C) is longer than the execution period of the acquired prize ball update effect (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds).

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention image, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while also issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

In addition, during the final round of jackpot RD control, after the prize ball update effect is executed to update the number of prize balls awarded based on a predetermined amount (10 in this example) of game balls entering the special variable prize ball device 7, images (time-saving entry image, ST entry image, ST continuation image) related to the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state are displayed, allowing the player to confirm the update to the number of prize balls awarded, preventing dissatisfaction with the update to the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game state.

(Effect 33)
As shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball cut error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-slip image.

As mentioned above, the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode) are advantageous game states for players because they make it easier for special symbol variations to be displayed and improve variation efficiency compared to the normal state (left-hand hit mode).

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention image, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while also issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

In addition, in the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode), the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the period from when a "jackpot" is indicated as a result of the variable display of the special pattern to when the jackpot round play begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of play in the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hand hit mode).

(Means 34)
As shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball cut error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-slip image.

As shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED effect for jackpot C, which occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds and 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED effect for the first jackpot (jackpot A and jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode), as shown in Figure 8-64.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention image, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while also issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

In addition, in the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode), variable displays are more likely to be displayed than in the normal state, and the period from the end of the final jackpot round play until the variable display of the special symbol can be displayed (jackpot ED period) is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of play in the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hand hit mode).

(Effect 35)
As shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball cut error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-slip image.

As shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation for the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds, 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation for the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode), as shown in Figure 8-55.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-64, the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED effect of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention image, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while also issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

In addition, in the normal state, time-saving state, and ST state (right-hand hit mode), the period from when a "jackpot" is derived as a result of the display of the special symbol variation to when the jackpot round play begins (jackpot FF period) is shorter than the period from when the final jackpot round play ends to when the special symbol variation display can be executed (jackpot ED period). This shortens the period until control is exercised in the jackpot play state, and allows the player to enjoy the lingering feeling when the jackpot play state ends for even longer.

(Effect 36)
As shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball cut error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-slip image.

As shown in Figure 8-54, the jackpot FF presentation displays the following: jackpot FF presentation (part 1): jackpot title display ("BONUS", "Yume Yume Bonus"), and jackpot FF presentation (part 2): first instruction image (1A instruction image, 1B instruction image) instructing the player to hit right during jackpot play.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (4 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) of jackpot A and jackpot B is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) of jackpot A and jackpot B. Similarly, as shown in Figure 8-56, the execution period (2 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) of jackpot C is longer than the execution period (1.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) of jackpot C.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention image, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while also issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

Furthermore, by making the period during which the jackpot title display is displayed longer than the period during which the first instruction image is displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the jackpot title display, emphasizing to the player that they are being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, by displaying the first instruction image after the jackpot title display has finished, players who were paying attention to the jackpot title display can continue to focus on the first instruction image.

(Effect 37)
As shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball cut error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-slip image.

As shown in Figure 8-70 (A), when the jackpot FF performance (Part 1) is executed with the reels (First Reel, Second Reel) installed, the visibility of the bottom left part of the character "Yume" and the top left part of the character "B" in the jackpot title display "Yume Yume Bonus" is reduced by the reels.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-70 (A), even when the reels (first reel, second reel) are installed, none of the reels are installed in the error image display area (top right of the screen) of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image (first error image) is not reduced by the reels.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention image, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while also issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

In addition, by positioning the reels so that they overlap the image display device 5, the player can be drawn to the image display device 5 and the reels when the effects are being executed, and by displaying part of the jackpot title display, which celebrates the game being controlled to a jackpot game state, in a position and size that reduces its visibility due to the reels, the player can be made to feel more strongly when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, since the error image needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, it is displayed in a position and size that does not reduce visibility due to the reels, allowing the player to be accurately notified that an error has occurred.

(Effect 38)
As shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball cut error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-slip image.

As shown in Figure 8-70 (B), when the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) is executed with the reels (first reel and second reel) installed, the visibility of part (the bottom part of the right-pointing arrow object and the bottom part of the character "hit") of the first instruction image (in this example, the right-pointing arrow object and the character "hit") is reduced by the reels.

As shown in Figure 8-70 (B), even when the reels (first reel, second reel) are installed, none of the reels are installed in the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image (first error image) is not reduced by the reels.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention image, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while also issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

In addition, by positioning the reel so that it overlaps with the image display device 5, the player can be drawn to the image display device 5 and the reel when the effects are being executed, and part of the first instruction image suggesting the operation method in the jackpot game state is displayed in a position and size that reduces its visibility due to the reel, which allows the player to be controlled into the jackpot game state and makes a stronger impression when the first instruction image is displayed.

On the other hand, since the error image needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, it is displayed in a position and size that does not reduce visibility due to the reels, allowing the player to be accurately notified that an error has occurred.

(Effect 39)
As shown in Figure 8-68, the acquired prize ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. Also, as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after the jackpot RD control of the final round is completed, the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) in which the total acquired prize ball image is displayed for 4.5 seconds is executed, and then the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) that notifies the end of the jackpot is executed. Therefore, the execution period of the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) is longer than the execution period of the acquired prize ball update effect (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds).

As shown in Figure 8-57, if a ball-out error occurs while the jackpot title display (the letters "BONUS") is displayed, the first error image is superimposed on the jackpot title display, which consists of two or more letters, "BONUS." The first error image is superimposed on the two letters "US" in the jackpot title display.

With this configuration, during the final round of jackpot RD control, after the prize ball update effect is executed to update the number of prize balls awarded based on a predetermined amount (10 in this example) of game balls entering the special variable prize ball device 7, images (time-saving entry image, ST entry image, ST continuation image) related to the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state are displayed, allowing the player to confirm the update to the number of prize balls awarded and preventing dissatisfaction with the update to the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game state.

In addition, if an error occurs while the jackpot title display is being displayed, an error image is superimposed on the jackpot title display, making it easier for players who were paying attention to the jackpot title display to recognize the error image, allowing them to continue playing smoothly after the error occurs.

(Effect 40)
As shown in Figure 8-68, the acquired prize ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. Also, as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after the jackpot RD control of the final round is completed, the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) in which the total acquired prize ball image is displayed for 4.5 seconds is executed, and then the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) that notifies the end of the jackpot is executed. Therefore, the execution period of the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) is longer than the execution period of the acquired prize ball update effect (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds).

As shown in Figure 8-57, if a ball-out error occurs while the first A instruction image is displayed, the first error image is superimposed on the first A instruction image, which consists of three characters: "Right hit." The first error image is superimposed on the three characters "Right hit" in the first A instruction image.

With this configuration, during the final round of jackpot RD control, after the prize ball update effect is executed to update the number of prize balls awarded based on a predetermined amount (10 in this example) of game balls entering the special variable prize ball device 7, images (time-saving entry image, ST entry image, ST continuation image) related to the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state are displayed, allowing the player to confirm the update to the number of prize balls awarded and preventing dissatisfaction with the update to the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game state.

In addition, if an error occurs while the first A instruction image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the first A instruction image, making it easier for players who have been paying attention to the first A instruction image to recognize the first error image, allowing gameplay to proceed smoothly after the error occurs.

(Effect 41)
As shown in Figure 8-68, the acquired prize ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. Also, as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after the jackpot RD control of the final round is completed, the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) in which the total acquired prize ball image is displayed for 4.5 seconds is executed, and then the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) that notifies the end of the jackpot is executed. Therefore, the execution period of the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) is longer than the execution period of the acquired prize ball update effect (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds).

As mentioned above, the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode) are advantageous game states for players because they make it easier for special symbol variations to be displayed and improve variation efficiency compared to the normal state (left-hand hit mode).

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

With this configuration, during the final round of jackpot RD control, after the prize ball update effect is executed to update the number of prize balls awarded based on a predetermined amount (10 in this example) of game balls entering the special variable prize ball device 7, images (time-saving entry image, ST entry image, ST continuation image) related to the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state are displayed, allowing the player to confirm the update to the number of prize balls awarded and preventing dissatisfaction with the update to the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode), the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the period from when a "jackpot" is indicated as a result of the variable display of the special pattern to when the jackpot round begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of gameplay in the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hand hit mode).

(Effect 42)
As shown in Figure 8-68, the acquired prize ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. Also, as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after the jackpot RD control of the final round is completed, the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) in which the total acquired prize ball image is displayed for 4.5 seconds is executed, and then the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) that notifies the end of the jackpot is executed. Therefore, the execution period of the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) is longer than the execution period of the acquired prize ball update effect (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds).

As shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED effect for jackpot C, which occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds and 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED effect for the first jackpot (jackpot A and jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode), as shown in Figure 8-64.

With this configuration, during the final round of jackpot RD control, after the prize ball update effect is executed to update the number of prize balls awarded based on a predetermined amount (10 in this example) of game balls entering the special variable prize ball device 7, images (time-saving entry image, ST entry image, ST continuation image) related to the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state are displayed, allowing the player to confirm the update to the number of prize balls awarded and preventing dissatisfaction with the update to the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode), variable displays are more likely to be displayed than in the normal state, and the period from the end of the final jackpot round play until the variable display of the special symbol can be displayed (jackpot ED period) is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of play in the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hand hit mode).

(Effect 43)
As shown in Figure 8-68, the acquired prize ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. Also, as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after the jackpot RD control of the final round is completed, the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) in which the total acquired prize ball image is displayed for 4.5 seconds is executed, and then the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) that notifies the end of the jackpot is executed. Therefore, the execution period of the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) is longer than the execution period of the acquired prize ball update effect (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds).

As shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation for the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds, 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation for the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode), as shown in Figure 8-55.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-64, the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED effect of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

With this configuration, during the final round of jackpot RD control, after the prize ball update effect is executed to update the number of prize balls awarded based on a predetermined amount (10 in this example) of game balls entering the special variable prize ball device 7, images (time-saving entry image, ST entry image, ST continuation image) related to the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state are displayed, allowing the player to confirm the update to the number of prize balls awarded and preventing dissatisfaction with the update to the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the normal state, time-saving state, and ST state (right-hand hit mode), the period from when a "jackpot" is derived as a result of the display of the special symbol variation to when the jackpot round play begins (jackpot FF period) is shorter than the period from when the final jackpot round play ends to when the special symbol variation display can be executed (jackpot ED period). This shortens the period until control is exercised in the jackpot play state, and allows the player to enjoy the lingering feeling when the jackpot play state ends for even longer.

(Effect 44)
As shown in Figure 8-68, the acquired prize ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. Also, as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after the jackpot RD control of the final round is completed, the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) in which the total acquired prize ball image is displayed for 4.5 seconds is executed, and then the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) that notifies the end of the jackpot is executed. Therefore, the execution period of the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) is longer than the execution period of the acquired prize ball update effect (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds).

As shown in Figure 8-54, the jackpot FF presentation displays the following: jackpot FF presentation (part 1): jackpot title display ("BONUS", "Yume Yume Bonus"), and jackpot FF presentation (part 2): first instruction image (1A instruction image, 1B instruction image) instructing the player to hit right during jackpot play.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (4 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) of jackpot A and jackpot B is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) of jackpot A and jackpot B. Similarly, as shown in Figure 8-56, the execution period (2 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) of jackpot C is longer than the execution period (1.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) of jackpot C.

With this configuration, during the final round of jackpot RD control, after the prize ball update effect is executed to update the number of prize balls awarded based on a predetermined amount (10 in this example) of game balls entering the special variable prize ball device 7, images (time-saving entry image, ST entry image, ST continuation image) related to the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state are displayed, allowing the player to confirm the update to the number of prize balls awarded and preventing dissatisfaction with the update to the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game state.

Furthermore, by making the period during which the jackpot title display is displayed longer than the period during which the first instruction image is displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the jackpot title display, emphasizing to the player that they are being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, by displaying the first instruction image after the jackpot title display has finished, players who were paying attention to the jackpot title display can continue to focus on the first instruction image.

(Effect 45)
As shown in Figure 8-68, the acquired prize ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. Also, as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after the jackpot RD control of the final round is completed, the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) in which the total acquired prize ball image is displayed for 4.5 seconds is executed, and then the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) that notifies the end of the jackpot is executed. Therefore, the execution period of the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) is longer than the execution period of the acquired prize ball update effect (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds).

As shown in Figure 8-70 (A), when the jackpot FF performance (Part 1) is executed with the reels (First Reel, Second Reel) installed, the visibility of the bottom left part of the character "Yume" and the top left part of the character "B" in the jackpot title display "Yume Yume Bonus" is reduced by the reels.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-70 (A), even when the reels (first reel, second reel) are installed, none of the reels are installed in the error image display area (top right of the screen) of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image (first error image) is not reduced by the reels.

With this configuration, during the final round of jackpot RD control, after the prize ball update effect is executed to update the number of prize balls awarded based on a predetermined amount (10 in this example) of game balls entering the special variable prize ball device 7, images (time-saving entry image, ST entry image, ST continuation image) related to the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state are displayed, allowing the player to confirm the update to the number of prize balls awarded and preventing dissatisfaction with the update to the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game state.

In addition, by positioning the reels so that they overlap the image display device 5, the player can be drawn to the image display device 5 and the reels when the effects are being executed, and by displaying part of the jackpot title display, which celebrates the game being controlled to a jackpot game state, in a position and size that reduces its visibility due to the reels, the player can be made to feel more strongly when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, since the error image needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, it is displayed in a position and size that does not reduce visibility due to the reels, allowing the player to be accurately notified that an error has occurred.

(Effect 46)
As shown in Figure 8-68, the acquired prize ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. Also, as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after the jackpot RD control of the final round is completed, the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) in which the total acquired prize ball image is displayed for 4.5 seconds is executed, and then the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) that notifies the end of the jackpot is executed. Therefore, the execution period of the jackpot ED effect (part 1A, part 1B, part 1C) is longer than the execution period of the acquired prize ball update effect (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds).

As shown in Figure 8-70 (B), when the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) is executed with the reels (first reel and second reel) installed, the visibility of part (the bottom part of the right-pointing arrow object and the bottom part of the character "hit") of the first instruction image (in this example, the right-pointing arrow object and the character "hit") is reduced by the reels.

As shown in Figure 8-70 (B), even when the reels (first reel, second reel) are installed, none of the reels are installed in the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image (first error image) is not reduced by the reels.

With this configuration, during the final round of jackpot RD control, after the prize ball update effect is executed to update the number of prize balls awarded based on a predetermined amount (10 in this example) of game balls entering the special variable prize ball device 7, images (time-saving entry image, ST entry image, ST continuation image) related to the jackpot ED effect (part 2A, part 3B, part 2C) corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state are displayed, allowing the player to confirm the update to the number of prize balls awarded and preventing dissatisfaction with the update to the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game state.

In addition, by positioning the reel so that it overlaps with the image display device 5, the player can be drawn to the image display device 5 and the reel when the effects are being executed, and part of the first instruction image suggesting the operation method in the jackpot game state is displayed in a position and size that reduces its visibility due to the reel, which allows the player to be controlled into the jackpot game state and makes a stronger impression when the first instruction image is displayed.

On the other hand, since the error image needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, it is displayed in a position and size that does not reduce visibility due to the reels, allowing the player to be accurately notified that an error has occurred.

(Effect 47)
As described above, the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hitting mode) are advantageous game states for players because the variable display of special symbols is more easily executed and the variable efficiency is improved compared to the normal state (left-hand hitting mode).

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

As shown in Figure 8-57, if a ball-out error occurs while the jackpot title display (the letters "BONUS") is displayed, the first error image is superimposed on the jackpot title display, which consists of two or more letters, "BONUS." The first error image is superimposed on the two letters "US" in the jackpot title display.

With this configuration, the variable display is more likely to be executed in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) than in the normal state, and the period from when a "jackpot" is detected as a result of the variable display of the special pattern to when the jackpot round begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of gameplay in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode).

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the jackpot title display is being displayed, an error image is superimposed on the jackpot title display, making it easier for players who were paying attention to the jackpot title display to recognize the error image, allowing them to continue playing smoothly after the error occurs.

(Effect 48)
As described above, the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hitting mode) are advantageous game states for players because the variable display of special symbols is more easily executed and the variable efficiency is improved compared to the normal state (left-hand hitting mode).

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

As shown in Figure 8-57, if a ball-out error occurs while the first A instruction image is displayed, the first error image is superimposed on the first A instruction image, which consists of three characters: "Right hit." The first error image is superimposed on the three characters "Right hit" in the first A instruction image.

With this configuration, the variable display is more likely to be executed in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) than in the normal state, and the period from when a "jackpot" is detected as a result of the variable display of the special pattern to when the jackpot round begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of gameplay in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode).

In addition, if an error occurs while the first A instruction image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the first A instruction image, making it easier for players who have been paying attention to the first A instruction image to recognize the first error image, allowing gameplay to proceed smoothly after the error occurs.

(Effect 49)
As described above, the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hitting mode) are advantageous game states for players because the variable display of special symbols is more easily executed and the variable efficiency is improved compared to the normal state (left-hand hitting mode).

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

As shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED effect for jackpot C, which occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds and 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED effect for the first jackpot (jackpot A and jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode), as shown in Figure 8-64.

With this configuration, the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode) make it easier for the variable display to be executed than in the normal state, and the period from when a "jackpot" is indicated as a result of the variable display of the special pattern to when the jackpot round play begins (jackpot FF period) is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of play in the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hand hit mode).

In addition, in the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode), variable displays are more likely to be displayed than in the normal state, and the period from the end of the final jackpot round play until the variable display of the special symbol can be displayed (jackpot ED period) is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of play in the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hand hit mode).

(Effect 50)
As described above, the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hitting mode) are advantageous game states for players because the variable display of special symbols is more easily executed and the variable efficiency is improved compared to the normal state (left-hand hitting mode).

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

As shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation for the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds, 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation for the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode), as shown in Figure 8-55.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-64, the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED effect of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

With this configuration, the variable display is more likely to be executed in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) than in the normal state, and the period from when a "jackpot" is detected as a result of the variable display of the special pattern to when the jackpot round begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of gameplay in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode).

In addition, in the normal state, time-saving state, and ST state (right-hand hit mode), the period from when a "jackpot" is derived as a result of the display of the special symbol variation to when the jackpot round play begins (jackpot FF period) is shorter than the period from when the final jackpot round play ends to when the special symbol variation display can be executed (jackpot ED period). This shortens the period until control is exercised in the jackpot play state, and allows the player to enjoy the lingering feeling when the jackpot play state ends for even longer.

(Effect 51)
As described above, the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hitting mode) are advantageous game states for players because the variable display of special symbols is more easily executed and the variable efficiency is improved compared to the normal state (left-hand hitting mode).

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

As shown in Figure 8-54, the jackpot FF presentation displays the following: jackpot FF presentation (part 1): jackpot title display ("BONUS", "Yume Yume Bonus"), and jackpot FF presentation (part 2): first instruction image (1A instruction image, 1B instruction image) instructing the player to hit right during jackpot play.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (4 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) of jackpot A and jackpot B is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) of jackpot A and jackpot B. Similarly, as shown in Figure 8-56, the execution period (2 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) of jackpot C is longer than the execution period (1.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) of jackpot C.

With this configuration, the variable display is more likely to be executed in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) than in the normal state, and the period from when a "jackpot" is detected as a result of the variable display of the special pattern to when the jackpot round begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of gameplay in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode).

Furthermore, by making the period during which the jackpot title display is displayed longer than the period during which the first instruction image is displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the jackpot title display, emphasizing to the player that they are being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, by displaying the first instruction image after the jackpot title display has finished, players who were paying attention to the jackpot title display can continue to focus on the first instruction image.

(Effect 52)
As described above, the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hitting mode) are advantageous game states for players because the variable display of special symbols is more easily executed and the variable efficiency is improved compared to the normal state (left-hand hitting mode).

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

As shown in Figure 8-70 (A), when the jackpot FF performance (Part 1) is executed with the reels (First Reel, Second Reel) installed, the visibility of the bottom left part of the character "Yume" and the top left part of the character "B" in the jackpot title display "Yume Yume Bonus" is reduced by the reels.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 8-70 (A), even when the reels (first reel, second reel) are installed, none of the reels are installed in the error image display area (top right of the screen) of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image (first error image) is not reduced by the reels.

With this configuration, the variable display is more likely to be executed in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) than in the normal state, and the period from when a "jackpot" is detected as a result of the variable display of the special pattern to when the jackpot round begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of gameplay in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode).

In addition, by positioning the reels so that they overlap the image display device 5, the player can be drawn to the image display device 5 and the reels when the effects are being executed, and by displaying part of the jackpot title display, which celebrates the game being controlled to a jackpot game state, in a position and size that reduces its visibility due to the reels, the player can be made to feel more strongly when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, since the error image needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, it is displayed in a position and size that does not reduce visibility due to the reels, allowing the player to be accurately notified that an error has occurred.

(Effect 53)
As described above, the time-saving state and ST state (right-hand hitting mode) are advantageous game states for players because the variable display of special symbols is more easily executed and the variable efficiency is improved compared to the normal state (left-hand hitting mode).

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF effect for jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56.

As shown in Figure 8-70 (B), when the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) is executed with the reels (first reel and second reel) installed, the visibility of part (the bottom part of the right-pointing arrow object and the bottom part of the character "hit") of the first instruction image (in this example, the right-pointing arrow object and the character "hit") is reduced by the reels.

As shown in Figure 8-70 (B), even when the reels (first reel, second reel) are installed, none of the reels are installed in the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image (first error image) is not reduced by the reels.

With this configuration, the variable display is more likely to be executed in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) than in the normal state, and the period from when a "jackpot" is detected as a result of the variable display of the special pattern to when the jackpot round begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of gameplay in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode) even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the time-saving state or ST state (right-hit mode).

In addition, by positioning the reel so that it overlaps with the image display device 5, the player can be drawn to the image display device 5 and the reel when the effects are being executed, and part of the first instruction image suggesting the operation method in the jackpot game state is displayed in a position and size that reduces its visibility due to the reel, which allows the player to be controlled into the jackpot game state and makes a stronger impression when the first instruction image is displayed.

On the other hand, since the error image needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, it is displayed in a position and size that does not reduce visibility due to the reels, allowing the player to be accurately notified that an error has occurred.

[Other Modifications]
(1) In the above embodiment, the gaming machine has been shown as an example having the gameplay of a [V-ST machine], but is not limited to this form, and the various effects and configurations shown in [Feature 02TM] may be applied to gaming machines having different gameplay. A [V-ST machine] is a gaming machine having gameplay in which, after the end of a jackpot game, a game ball enters a variable V winning ball device (V lid) and then enters a V winning port, thereby executing probability variable control over a maximum of 154 variable displays.

(1-1) [One type + two types mixer]
For example, the effects shown in the above embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine with a [Type 1 + Type 2 Mixed Machine] gameplay. This gaming machine is equipped with: (i) a [Type 1 Jackpot] that controls to a jackpot gaming state when the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot," and (ii) a [Type 2 Jackpot] that controls to a small jackpot gaming state when the display result of the variable display becomes a "small jackpot," allowing the gaming medium to enter the V prize area in the V prize winning device, and controls to a jackpot gaming state when the gaming medium enters the V prize area. That is, (i + ii) this gaming machine is equipped with a [Type 1 + Type 2 Mixed Machine] that has the patterns of [Type 1 Jackpot] and [Type 2 Jackpot] as patterns for controlling to a jackpot gaming state.

(1-2) [V-Variable Machine]
The effects shown in the above embodiments may also be applied to gaming machines with the gameplay characteristics of a [V-probability variable machine]. A [V-probability variable machine] is provided with a normal state, which is a low-probability state, and a probability variable state, which is a high-probability state (a game state in which probability variable control is executed). As jackpot types, a "normal jackpot" in which probability variable control is not executed, and a "probability variable jackpot" in which probability variable control is executed are provided. A [V-probability variable machine] is a gaming machine with gameplay characteristics in which, after a game ball enters the variable V winning ball device (V lid) in the first round of a jackpot game state, it enters the V winning port, thereby executing probability variable control over the period from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot occurs.

When a jackpot occurs based on the variable display of the first special symbol, there is a 50% chance that it will be determined as a "3R normal jackpot" and a 50% chance that it will be determined as a "3R special jackpot." Additionally, when a jackpot occurs based on the variable display of the second special symbol, there is a 20% chance that it will be determined as a "10R normal jackpot" and an 80% chance that it will be determined as a "10R special jackpot."

(1-3) [Chance Fall Machine]
Furthermore, the effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied to a gaming machine having the gameplay characteristics of a "probability change machine." There are pachinko gaming machines that, when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state, execute a probability change determination as to whether or not to transition the gaming state to a low probability state, and transition the gaming state to the low probability state based on the result of the probability change determination. The invention described in the above embodiments can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines that execute a probability change determination. Below, a pachinko gaming machine that executes a probability change determination will be described.

In such pachinko gaming machines, when a start winning entry (a win in the first start winning entry slot or the second start winning entry slot) occurs, a random number for determining whether or not to enter or exit the high probability state is sampled. When the variable display of the special symbol based on that start winning entry is executed in the high probability state, a determination is made based on the random number for determining whether or not to end the high probability state (presence or absence of a so-called probability falling) and the high probability state is terminated based on the result of the determination. Specifically, when a win in the first start winning entry slot or the second start winning entry is detected in the switch processing shown in step S21 of FIG. 4, the CPU 103 samples a random number for determining whether or not to enter or exit the high probability state. When the variable display of the special symbol based on that winning entry begins in the high probability state (during the normal special symbol processing shown in step S110 of FIG. 5), a probability falling determination is made to determine whether or not to end the high probability state based on the random number for determining whether or not to enter the high probability state, and the high probability state is terminated and a transition to a low probability state is made based on the result of the determination.

This probability drop determination uses a random number for probability drop determination to determine whether the game will fall into probability mode or not, and the high probability state continues based on the determination that there is no probability drop, and ends based on the determination that there is a probability drop, and the game is controlled to a low probability state.

In this way, when a starting winning occurs (winning into the first starting winning slot or the second starting winning slot), a random number is extracted for determining whether or not to enter or exit the probability mode. When a special symbol variable display based on that starting winning is executed in a high-probability state, a determination is made based on the random number for determining whether or not to end the high-probability state (presence or absence of a probability mode variable), and the high-probability state is ended based on the determination result. Therefore, if the probability mode variable drop determination determines that "a probability mode variable drop will occur" at the timing when the variable display begins in a high-probability state (probability mode), the display results for subsequent variable displays, including that variable display, are determined based on the display result determination table for the low-probability state (normal state or time-saving state) (the display result determination table for the first special symbol or the display result determination table for the second special symbol).

<Game flow for gaming machines with probability drop detection>
Next, a game flow in a pachinko game machine that executes a probability variable drop determination will be explained. In this example of the game flow, when a jackpot occurs and a game ball enters the probability variable area (V entry), the game is controlled to a probability variable state (high probability/high base state) after the jackpot game state ends, and a probability variable drop determination is executed when a variable display starts in the probability variable state. Here, (i) when the display result of the variable display executed in the probability variable state is not a "jackpot" and a "probability variable drop" is determined in any of the probability variable drop determinations executed in response to the 100th variable display by the time the 100th variable display is started, the variable display (any of the first to 100th variable displays) corresponding to the probability variable drop determination that determined a "probability variable drop" is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) from the start, and is maintained in the time-saving state until the 100th variable display ends, and then controlled to a normal state (low probability/low base state).

On the other hand, (ii) if none of the probability variable drop judgments executed in response to the first 100 variable displays result in a "probability variable drop" judgment, the probability variable state (high probability/high base state) will be maintained until the end of at least the 100th variable display, and when a probability variable drop judgment executed in response to the 101st or subsequent variable display results in a "probability variable drop", the game will be controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state) from the start of the variable display corresponding to the probability variable drop judgment that determined that a "probability variable drop" occurred.

(2) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which, regardless of whether the first or second display control of the fifth instruction image is being executed, when the jackpot FF effect is executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction effect is immediately terminated and the display of the fifth instruction image is also terminated. However, this is not limited to this form, and when the jackpot FF effect is executed when the first or second display control of the fifth instruction image is being executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction effect does not have to be immediately terminated and the display of the fifth instruction image does not have to be immediately terminated either.

For example, if a jackpot FF effect is executed while the first display control of the fifth instruction image is being executed, the abnormal left-hit instruction effect may continue to be executed until the first display control of the fifth instruction image is completed, and the abnormal left-hit instruction effect may end after the first display control of the fifth instruction image is completed. In other words, the second display control of the fifth instruction image is not executed.

(3) In the above embodiment, when an abnormal left-hit instruction effect is executed, the image of the fifth instruction image including a left-pointing arrow object and the text "Hit Left" is an example of an image that is controlled to frame in from the right edge of the screen of the image display device 5 and frame out towards the left edge of the screen. However, this is not limited to this form, and the image of the fifth instruction image including a left-pointing arrow object and the text "Hit Left" when an abnormal left-hit instruction effect is executed may be an image that is controlled to frame in from the right edge of the screen of the image display device 5 and frame out towards the left edge of the screen.

For example, when an abnormal left-hit instruction effect is executed, the image of the fifth instruction image including a left-pointing arrow object and the words "left-hit" may be an image that is controlled to frame in from the left edge of the screen of the image display device 5 and frame out towards the right edge of the screen, or it may be an image that is controlled to expand from the back of the screen of the image display device 5 towards the front of the screen.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the image including the right-pointing arrow object and the text "Hit Right" in the fourth instruction image when an abnormal right-hit instruction effect is executed is an image that is controlled to frame in from the left edge of the screen of the image display device 5 and frame out towards the right edge of the screen. However, this is not limited to this form, and the image including the right-pointing arrow object and the text "Hit Right" in the fourth instruction image when an abnormal right-hit instruction effect is executed may be an image that is controlled to frame in from the left edge of the screen of the image display device 5 and frame out towards the right edge of the screen in a different way.

For example, when an abnormal right-hit instruction effect is executed, the image of the fourth instruction image including a right-pointing arrow object and the words "right hit" may be an image that is controlled to frame in from the right edge of the screen of the image display device 5 and frame out towards the left edge of the screen, or it may be an image that is controlled to expand from the back of the screen of the image display device 5 towards the front of the screen.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which if a jackpot FF effect is executed while a volume adjustment effect (volume adjustment display, volume adjustment sound) is being executed when the volume is increased, the volume adjustment effect continues to be executed. However, this is not limited to this form, and if a jackpot FF effect is executed while a volume adjustment effect (volume adjustment display, volume adjustment sound) is being executed when the volume is decreased, the volume adjustment effect continues to be executed.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which if a jackpot FF effect is executed when a light intensity adjustment effect (light intensity adjustment display, light intensity adjustment sound) is being executed when increasing the light intensity, the light intensity adjustment effect continues to be executed. However, this is not limited to this form, and if a jackpot FF effect is executed when a light intensity adjustment effect (light intensity adjustment display, light intensity adjustment sound) is being executed when decreasing the light intensity, the light intensity adjustment effect continues to be executed.

(6) In the above embodiment, when the volume value is set to the maximum or minimum value, an operation of the volume adjustment button to change the volume above the maximum value or below the minimum value is not accepted, and the volume value is not changed, so the volume adjustment effect is not executed. However, this is not limited to this form, and when the volume value is set to the maximum or minimum value, the volume value is not changed, but the volume adjustment effect may be executed by accepting an operation of the volume adjustment button to change the volume above the maximum value or below the minimum value.

For example, if the volume value is set to the maximum value and the volume adjustment button (+) is operated to increase the volume above the maximum value, the volume value will not change, but a volume adjustment effect will be executed. In this volume adjustment effect, the volume adjustment display (volume value: 3) will flash, and the volume adjustment voice "Volume is at maximum" will be played and output.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, when the light intensity value is set to the maximum or minimum value, an operation of the light intensity adjustment button to increase the light intensity above the maximum value or decrease it below the minimum value is not accepted, and the light intensity value is not changed, so the light intensity adjustment effect is not executed. However, this is not limited to this form, and when the light intensity value is set to the maximum or minimum value, the light intensity value is not changed, but an operation of the light intensity adjustment button to increase the light intensity above the maximum value or decrease it below the minimum value is accepted, and the light intensity adjustment effect is executed.

For example, if the light intensity value is set to the minimum value and the light intensity adjustment button (-) is operated to lower the volume below the minimum value, the light intensity value will not change, but a light intensity adjustment effect will be executed. In this light intensity adjustment effect, the light intensity adjustment display (volume value: 1) will flash, and the light intensity adjustment voice "Light intensity is at minimum" will be played and output.

The [Feature 02TM] described above includes the following configurations:

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
and an operation means (a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of performing an operation related to the launch of a game medium (a game ball),
The paths along which the game media flow down include a first path (left-hand path) and a second path (right-hand path) different from the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in a first operation manner (left-handed hit), the game medium is launched along the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation manner (right hit), the game medium is launched along the second path,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation method while the operation means is in the normal state, a warning (instruction to hit left abnormally) can be issued to notify the player to operate the operation means in the first operation method.
It is possible to execute an error notification (error notification (bulb out error notification, etc.)) to notify that an error has occurred,
When the fanfare effect is executed while the warning is being executed, the warning is terminated (as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the abnormal left hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left hit instruction is terminated),
A gaming machine that continues to execute the error notification when the fanfare effect is executed while the error notification is being executed (as shown in Figure 8-21, even if a jackpot FF effect is executed while the ball-out error notification is being executed, the ball-out error notification is continued to be executed).

According to this configuration, by ending the ongoing warning when the fanfare effect is executed, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the operating means using the first operating method without interfering with the fanfare effect.
Furthermore, by continuing to notify an error that is currently being executed when the fanfare effect is being performed, it becomes easier for players to recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, and an appropriate error notification can be given to the player.
As a result, when the fanfare effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
and an operation means (a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of performing an operation related to the launch of a game medium (a game ball),
The paths along which the game media flow down include a first path (left-hand path) and a second path (right-hand path) different from the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in a first operation manner (left-handed hit), the game medium is launched along the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation manner (right hit), the game medium is launched along the second path,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation method while the control is in the normal state, a first operation promotion notification (abnormal left hit instruction) can be executed to notify the player to operate the operation means in the first operation method,
It is possible to execute an error notification (bulb out error notification) to notify that an error has occurred,
When the fanfare effect is executed while the first operation prompt notification is being executed, the first operation prompt notification is terminated (as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the abnormal left hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left hit instruction is terminated),
When the fanfare effect is executed while the error notification is being executed, the error notification is continued (as shown in FIG. 8-21, even if the jackpot FF effect is executed while the ball out error notification is being executed, the ball out error notification is continued),
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control it to a special state (time-saving state, ST state) different from the normal state,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the special state is controlled, if a predetermined condition is met by the player operating the operation means using the first operation method, a second operation promotion notification can be executed to notify the player to operate using the second operation method (as shown in step S02TM1230: YES in FIG. 8-9, if the abnormal left-hit detection condition is met, an abnormal right-hit instruction can be executed),
After a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the fanfare effect, a second operation prompt notification can be executed (as shown in step S02TM1240: NO in FIG. 8-9, in the case of a jackpot RD period or a jackpot ED period after the jackpot FF period has ended, an abnormal right-hit instruction can be executed),
A gaming machine that does not execute the second operation promotion notification if the specified condition is met by the player operating the operation means using the first operation method while the fanfare effect is being performed and before the specified period has elapsed since the start of the fanfare effect (as shown in step S02TM1240: YES in Figure 8-9, if it is during the jackpot FF period, does not execute the abnormal right-hit instruction).

According to this configuration, by terminating the first operation promotion notification that is being executed when the fanfare effect is executed, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the operation means using the first operation method without interfering with the fanfare effect.
Furthermore, by continuing to notify an error that is currently being executed when the fanfare effect is being performed, it becomes easier for players to recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, and an appropriate error notification can be given to the player.
Furthermore, since the second operation promotion notification is executed after a predetermined period has elapsed since the fanfare performance started, even if a predetermined condition is established before the predetermined period has elapsed since the fanfare performance started, the second operation promotion notification is not executed, so that the fanfare performance is not disturbed and loss of interest can be prevented.
As a result, when the fanfare effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means 3 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
and an operation means (a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of performing an operation related to the launch of a game medium (a game ball),
The paths along which the gaming media flow down include a first path (left-hand path) and a second path (right-hand path) different from the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in a first operation manner (left-handed hit), the game medium is launched along the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation manner (right hit), the game medium is launched along the second path,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation method while the operation means is in the normal state, a warning (instruction to hit left abnormally) can be issued to notify the player to operate the operation means in the first operation method.
The volume and light intensity can be adjusted by the player (volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment can be performed),
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When a player adjusts the volume and the light intensity, an adjustment display (a volume adjustment display, a light intensity adjustment display) relating to the volume and the light intensity can be displayed;
When the fanfare effect is executed while the warning is being executed, the warning is terminated (as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the abnormal left hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left hit instruction is terminated),
When the fanfare effect is executed while the adjustment display is displayed, the adjustment display continues to be displayed (as shown in Figures 8-38 and 8-40, when a jackpot FF effect is executed while the volume adjustment display or light intensity adjustment display is displayed, the volume adjustment display or light intensity adjustment display continues to be displayed).

According to this configuration, when the fanfare effect is being performed, the ongoing warning message is terminated, and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the operating means using the first operating method without interfering with the fanfare effect.
Furthermore, by continuously displaying the adjustment display being performed while the fanfare performance is being performed, the adjustment display for the volume and light intensity can be confirmed without interfering with the fanfare performance.
As a result, when the fanfare effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means 4 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
and an operation means (a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of performing an operation related to the launch of a game medium (a game ball),
The paths along which the game media flow down include a first path (left-hand path) and a second path (right-hand path) different from the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in a first operation manner (left-handed hit), the game medium is launched along the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation manner (right hit), the game medium is launched along the second path,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation method while the machine is controlled to the normal state, a warning sound (a fifth instruction sound corresponding to an abnormal left hit instruction) can be output to notify the player to operate the operation means in the first operation method,
The volume and light intensity can be adjusted by the player (volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment can be performed),
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the player adjusts the volume and the light intensity, a specific sound (a volume adjustment sound, a light intensity adjustment sound) corresponding to the change in the volume and the light intensity can be output;
When the fanfare effect is executed while the attention sound is being output, the output of the attention sound is terminated (as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the fifth instruction sound is being output, the output of the fifth instruction sound is terminated),
When the fanfare effect is executed while the specific sound is being output, the specific sound is continuously output (as shown in Figures 8-38 and 8-40, when a jackpot FF effect is executed while volume adjustment sound or light intensity adjustment sound is being played and output, the volume adjustment sound or light intensity adjustment sound is continuously played and output).

According to this configuration, by ending the output of the warning sound that is being output when the fanfare effect is being executed, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the operating means using the first operating method without interfering with the fanfare effect.
Furthermore, since the specific sound being output continues to be output when the fanfare performance is being executed, the specific sound can be confirmed without interfering with the fanfare performance, and the fanfare performance can be enjoyed with an appropriate volume and light intensity.
As a result, when the fanfare effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means 5 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
and an operation means (a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of performing an operation related to the launch of a game medium (a game ball),
The paths along which the game media flow down include a first path (left-hand path) and a second path (right-hand path) different from the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in a first operation manner (left-handed hit), the game medium is launched along the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation manner (right hit), the game medium is launched along the second path,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation method while the operation means is in the normal state, a warning (instruction to hit left abnormally) can be issued to notify the player to operate the operation means in the first operation method.
A performance operation means (operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A)) different from the operation means is provided,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
It is possible to execute an operation promotion effect (button effect) for prompting the operation of the operation means for effect,
It is possible to control the device to one of two modes: a first mode (auto button OFF mode) in which, when a performance-purpose operation prompting effect is being executed, the player operates the performance-purpose operation means to execute a performance corresponding to the performance-purpose operation prompting effect; and a second mode (auto button ON mode) in which, when a performance-purpose operation prompting effect is being executed, the player does not operate the performance-purpose operation means to execute a performance corresponding to the performance-purpose operation prompting effect;
When the vehicle is being controlled in the first mode, a first display (auto button OFF setting display) indicating that the vehicle is being controlled in the first mode can be displayed,
When the vehicle is being controlled in the second mode, a second display (auto button ON setting display) indicating that the vehicle is being controlled in the second mode can be displayed.
When the fanfare effect is executed while the warning is being executed, the warning is terminated (as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the abnormal left hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left hit instruction is terminated),
When the fanfare effect is executed while the first display is being displayed, the first display is continuously displayed (as shown in FIG. 8-45, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the auto button OFF setting display is being displayed, the auto button OFF setting display is continuously displayed),
A gaming machine in which, when the fanfare effect is executed while the second display is being displayed, the second display continues to be displayed (as shown in Figure 8-47, when a jackpot FF effect is executed while the auto button ON setting display is being displayed, the auto button ON setting display continues to be displayed).

According to this configuration, when the fanfare effect is being performed, the ongoing warning message is terminated, and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the operating means using the first operating method without interfering with the fanfare effect.
Furthermore, by continuing to display the first display or second display that is being displayed while the fanfare performance is being executed, it is possible to confirm whether the display is being controlled in the first mode or the second mode without interfering with the fanfare performance.
As a result, when the fanfare effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means 6 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
and an operation means (a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of performing an operation related to the launch of a game medium (a game ball),
The paths along which the game media flow down include a first path (left-hand path) and a second path (right-hand path) different from the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in a first operation manner (left-handed hit), the game medium is launched along the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation manner (right hit), the game medium is launched along the second path,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation method while the machine is in the normal state, a warning sound (a fifth instruction sound corresponding to an abnormal left hit instruction) can be output to notify the player to operate the operation means in the first operation method.
A performance operation means (operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A)) different from the operation means is provided,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
It is possible to execute an operation promotion effect (button effect) for prompting the operation of the operation means for effect,
It is possible to control the device to one of two modes: a first mode (auto button OFF mode) in which, when a performance-purpose operation prompting effect is being executed, the player operates the performance-purpose operation means to execute a performance corresponding to the performance-purpose operation prompting effect; and a second mode (auto button ON mode) in which, when a performance-purpose operation prompting effect is being executed, the player does not operate the performance-purpose operation means to execute a performance corresponding to the performance-purpose operation prompting effect;
When the vehicle is being controlled in the first mode, a first sound (auto button OFF setting sound) indicating that the vehicle is being controlled in the first mode can be output.
When the vehicle is being controlled in the second mode, a second sound (auto button ON setting sound) indicating that the vehicle is being controlled in the second mode can be output.
When the fanfare effect is executed while the attention sound is being output, the output of the attention sound is terminated (as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the fifth instruction sound is being output, the output of the fifth instruction sound is terminated),
When the fanfare effect is executed while the first sound is being output, the first sound is continuously output (as shown in FIG. 8-45, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the auto button OFF setting sound is being played back and output, the auto button OFF setting sound is continuously played and output),
When the fanfare effect is executed while the second sound is displayed, the second sound is continuously output (as shown in Figure 8-47, when a jackpot FF effect is executed while the auto button ON setting sound is being played and output, the auto button ON setting sound is continuously played and output).

According to this configuration, by ending the output of the warning sound that is being output when the fanfare effect is being executed, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the operating means using the first operating method without interfering with the fanfare effect.
Furthermore, by continuously outputting the first sound and the second sound that are being output when the fanfare performance is being executed, it is possible to confirm whether the first mode or the second mode is being controlled without interfering with the fanfare performance.
As a result, when the fanfare effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means 7 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing performance is provided,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
A specific display (jackpot title display (BONUS, Yume Yume BONUS, etc.)) corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the specific display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed superimposed on the specific display (as shown in FIG. 8-57, if a ball-out error occurs while a jackpot title display (the letters "BONUS") is being displayed, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the jackpot title display),
The specific display is composed of multiple characters (as shown in FIG. 8-57, the jackpot title display "BONUS" is composed of two or more characters),
When the error display is displayed superimposed on the specific display, the error display is displayed superimposed on at least two or more characters of the specific display (as shown in Figure 8-57, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the two characters "US" of the jackpot title display), a gaming machine.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while a special display is being displayed, the error display will be superimposed on the special display, making it easier for players who were paying attention to the special display to recognize the error display, allowing them to continue playing smoothly after the error occurs.

The gaming machine of means 8 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing performances is provided,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, an operation prompting display (normal right-hit instruction (first A instruction image, first B instruction image) "right-hit") suggesting an operation method in the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the operation prompting display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed superimposed on the operation prompting display (as shown in FIG. 8-57, if a bulb-out error occurs while the first A instruction image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the first A instruction image),
The operation prompting display is composed of a plurality of characters (as shown in FIG. 8-57, the first A instruction image “Right Hit” is composed of two or more characters),
When the error display is displayed superimposed on the operation prompt display, the error display is displayed superimposed on at least two or more characters of the operation prompt display (as shown in Figure 8-57, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the three characters ``hit right'' of the first A instruction image), gaming machine.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while an operation prompt is being displayed, the error prompt is superimposed on the display, making it easier for players who were paying attention to the operation prompt to recognize the error, allowing them to continue playing smoothly after the error occurs.

The gaming machine of means 9 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing performances is provided,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
In connection with the end of the advantageous state, an addiction prevention display (addiction prevention image) for preventing addiction to the game can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the anti-addiction display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-addiction display (as shown in Figure 8-65, if a ball-out error occurs while the anti-addiction image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-addiction image).

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention display is displayed, the error display is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention display, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while still issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

The gaming machine of means 10 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium (game ball) can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
and a game value providing means (CPU 103 capable of providing prize balls in jackpot RD control) capable of providing game value when the game medium enters the variable winning means when the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When a predetermined amount of game media enters the variable winning means while the round control means is controlling the variable winning means to the first state in one of the multiple round games, the round control means changes the variable winning means to the second state, thereby ending the one round game (when 10 game balls enter the special variable winning ball device 7 in the nth jackpot round control, the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the jackpot round control is ended).
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute an update of the amount of the game value awarded by the game medium entering the variable winning means (an acquired prize ball update effect),
When the game medium enters the variable winning means, the award amount can be updated for a first period (as shown in FIG. 8-68, the winning ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds),
In the final round of the multiple rounds of play, based on a predetermined amount of the game media entering the variable winning means, after a second period has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the first state to the second state, a specific display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after ending the jackpot RD control of the final round and executing a jackpot ED performance (Part 1A, Part 1B, Part 1C) in which an image of the total number of winning balls is displayed for 4.5 seconds, a jackpot ED performance (Part 2A, Part 3B, Part 2C) informing that the jackpot has ended is executed),
A gaming machine, wherein the second period is longer than the first period (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds).

With this configuration, in the final round of multiple rounds of play, after the award amount is updated based on a predetermined amount of gaming media entering the variable winning means, a specific display indicating the end of the advantageous state is displayed, allowing the player to confirm the award amount update and preventing dissatisfaction with the award amount update while in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 11 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
and a round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game that controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control it to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
When controlled in the normal state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state is shorter than the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state (as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) as shown in Figure 8-56 is shorter than the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode)).

With this configuration, variable displays are more likely to be executed in the special state than in the normal state, and the period from when a specific display result is derived as a display result for the variable display of specific identification information to when a round of play begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of play in the special state even faster, and prevents players from feeling stressed when playing in the special state.

The gaming machine of means 12 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
and a round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control it to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
In the last round of play among the plurality of rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the normal state, the period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable is shorter than the period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable in the last round of play among the plurality of rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the special state (as shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) as shown in Figure 8-64 is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds, 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode)).

With this configuration, variable display is more easily executed in the special state than in the normal state, and the period from the end of the last round of play until variable display of specific identification information can be executed is shorter than in the normal state, which makes the speed of gameplay in the special state even faster and reduces stress on the player when playing in the special state.

The gaming machine of means 13 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
and a round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control it to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
In the last round of play among the multiple rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the normal state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means changes to the first state when controlled in the normal state is shorter than the period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable (as shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) occurring in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds, 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) occurring in the normal state (normal mode)).
In the last round of play among the multiple rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the special state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable is shorter when controlled in the special state (as shown in Figure 8-56, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) is shorter than the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) as shown in Figure 8-64).

With this configuration, in both the normal state and the special state, the period from when the final round of play ends until the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable is shorter than the period from when the specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display of the specific identification information until the round of play begins. This shortens the period until control is achieved in an advantageous state and allows players to enjoy the lingering feeling when the advantageous state ends for even longer.

The gaming machine of means 14 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
and a round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (jackpot B) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
When controlled to the first advantageous state and when controlled to the second advantageous state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display of the specific identification information until when the variable winning means changes to the first state is the same (as shown in Figure 8-55, when jackpot A occurs, the combined period of the pattern determination period and the execution period of the jackpot FF presentation, and when jackpot B occurs, the combined period of the pattern determination period and the execution period of the jackpot FF presentation are both 7.5 seconds),
When controlled to the first advantageous state, the period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable is longer in the last round of play among the multiple rounds of play in the first advantageous state than in the last round of play among the multiple rounds of play in the second advantageous state (as shown in Figure 8-61, the execution period of the jackpot ED presentation of jackpot B (19 seconds) is longer than the execution period of the jackpot ED presentation of jackpot A (9 seconds)).

According to this configuration, the period from when a specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of specific identification information until when the variable winning means changes to the first state is the same in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, so that regardless of which advantageous state is controlled to, the blessing that was performed before being controlled to the advantageous state can be performed in the same way.
Furthermore, the period from the end of the last round of play until variable display of specific identification information becomes possible is set to be longer in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state, so that the player can enjoy the afterglow of having been controlled in the second advantageous state all the more.

The gaming machine of means 15 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying a title display corresponding to the advantageous state and, after the display of the title display has ended, an operation prompt display suggesting an operation method in the advantageous state during the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information until when the variable winning means changes to the first state (as shown in FIG. 8-54, the effect control CPU 120 displays, in the jackpot FF effect, a jackpot FF effect (first part): a jackpot title display ("BONUS", etc.), and a jackpot FF effect (second part): a first instruction image (firstA instruction image, etc.) instructing a right hit in a jackpot game),
A gaming machine in which the period during which the title display is displayed is longer than the period during which the operation prompt display is displayed (as shown in Figure 8-55, etc., the execution period (4 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2)).

According to this configuration, by making the period during which the title display is displayed longer than the period during which the operation prompt display is displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the title display, and to emphasize to the player that the game is being controlled to an advantageous state.
Furthermore, by displaying the operation prompt display after the title display has finished being displayed, it is possible to make the player who has been paying attention to the title display continue to pay attention to the operation prompt display.

The gaming machine of means 16 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance,
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it can be controlled to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
When the effect execution means is controlled to the normal state and when the effect execution means is controlled to the special state, during the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information until the variable winning means changes to the first state, the effect execution means can display a title display corresponding to the advantageous state and an operation prompt display suggesting an operation method in the advantageous state after the display of the title display has ended (as shown in FIG. 8-54(A) , in the jackpot FF effect, the effect control CPU 120 can display the first win ( In the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) of jackpot A and jackpot B), the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) displays a jackpot title display ("BONUS"), and in the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) displays a first instruction image (1A instruction image) instructing a right hit during a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 8-54 (B), in the jackpot FF presentation of jackpot C, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a jackpot FF presentation (part 1) displays a jackpot title display ("Yume Yume Bonus"), and in the jackpot FF presentation (part 2) displays a first instruction image (1B instruction image, etc.) instructing a right hit during a jackpot game.
The period during which the title display is displayed is longer than the period during which the operation prompt display is displayed (as shown in Figure 8-55, for the first hit (jackpot A, jackpot B), the execution period (4 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2). Also, as shown in Figure 8-56, for the jackpot C, the execution period (2 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) is longer than the execution period (1.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2)). Gaming machine.

According to this configuration, when the game is controlled to at least one of the normal state and the special state, the period during which the title display is displayed is made longer than the period during which the operation prompt display is displayed, thereby making it possible to draw the player's attention to the title display and to emphasize to the player that the game is controlled to an advantageous state.
Furthermore, by displaying the operation prompt display after the title display has finished being displayed, it is possible to make the player who has been paying attention to the title display continue to pay attention to the operation prompt display.

The gaming machine of means 17 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
Display means (image display device 5);
A performance means (first role, second role) that can be arranged at a position superimposed on the display means and is used for performance;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When controlled to the advantageous state, a title display (jackpot title display) corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
The title display is displayed at a display position and size that reduces the visibility of a part of the title display by the effect means (as shown in Figure 8-70 (A) , when the first and second roles are provided and the jackpot FF effect (first part) is executed, the visibility of a part (in this example, the bottom left part of the character "Yume" and the top left part of the character "B") of the jackpot title display (in this example, the characters "Yume Yume Bonus") is reduced by the role),
The error display is displayed by the presentation means at a display position and size that does not reduce the visibility of the error display (as shown in Figure 8-70 (A), even when the first and second roles are provided, neither role is installed so as to overlap the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image is not reduced by the roles), gaming machine.

With this configuration, the presentation means used in the presentation are positioned so that they overlap the display means, thereby drawing the player's attention to the display means and presentation means when the presentation is being executed, and part of the title display celebrating the player being controlled to an advantageous state is displayed in a position and size that reduces its visibility due to the presentation means, thereby making a stronger impression on the player when the player is controlled to an advantageous state.
On the other hand, since the error display needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, the display position and size are set so that visibility is not reduced by the presentation means, thereby allowing the player to be accurately notified of the occurrence of an error.

The gaming machine of means 18 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
Display means (image display device 5);
A performance means (first role, second role) that can be arranged at a position superimposed on the display means and is used for performance;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When controlled to the advantageous state, an operation prompting display (a first instruction image (a firstA instruction image, etc.)) suggesting an operation method in the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
The operation prompt display is displayed at a display position and size that reduces the visibility of a part of the operation prompt display by the presentation means (as shown in Figure 8-70 (B) , when the first and second role devices are provided and the jackpot FF presentation (second part) is executed, the role devices reduce the visibility of a part (in this example, the lower part of the right-pointing arrow object and the lower part of the character "Hit") of the first instruction image (in this example, the right-pointing arrow object and the character "Hit");
The error display is displayed by the presentation means at a display position and size that does not reduce the visibility of the error display (as shown in Figure 8-70 (B), even when the first and second roles are provided, neither role is installed so as to overlap the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image is not reduced by the roles), gaming machine.

According to this configuration, the presentation means used in the presentation are positioned so as to overlap the display means, thereby drawing the player's attention to the display means and presentation means when the presentation is being executed, and part of the operation prompt display suggesting the operation method in an advantageous state is displayed in a position and size that reduces visibility by the presentation means, thereby controlling the state to be advantageous for the player and making a stronger impression when the operation prompt display is displayed.
On the other hand, since the error display needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, the display position and size are set so that visibility is not reduced by the presentation means, thereby allowing the player to be accurately notified of the occurrence of an error.

The gaming machine of means 19 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing performance is provided,
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control it to a special state (ST state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled from the normal state to the advantageous state and then controlled to the special state, a result display relating to the amount of game value awarded is displayed when the special state ends and the game is controlled to the normal state (as shown in FIG. 8-73, when the game is controlled to the ST state, a result display including information relating to the number of prize balls awarded to the player and the number of jackpots is displayed when the ST state ends and the game is controlled to the normal state),
When the game machine is not controlled to the special state after being controlled from the normal state to the advantageous state, the result display is not displayed when the advantageous state ends and the game machine is controlled to the normal state (as shown in Figure 8-71, when the game machine is controlled to the time-saving state, the result display including information related to the number of prize balls awarded to the player and the number of jackpots is not displayed when the time-saving state ends and the game machine is controlled to the normal state).

With this configuration, if the special state is not reached, the result display is not displayed, and the player is not notified of the fact that the game value that could have been awarded if the special state had been reached was not awarded, preventing the player from feeling dejected or stressed.

The gaming machine of means 20 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
and an operation means (a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of performing an operation related to the launch of a game medium (a game ball),
The paths along which the game media flow down include a first path (left-hand path) and a second path (right-hand path) different from the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in a first operation manner (left-handed hit), the game medium is launched along the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation manner (right hit), the game medium is launched along the second path,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation method while the operation means is in the normal state, a warning (instruction to hit left abnormally) can be issued to notify the player to operate the operation means in the first operation method.
It is possible to execute an error notification (error notification (bulb out error notification, etc.)) to notify that an error has occurred,
When the fanfare effect is executed while the warning is being executed, the warning is terminated (as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the abnormal left hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left hit instruction is terminated),
When the fanfare effect is executed while the error notification is being executed, the error notification is continued (as shown in FIG. 8-21, even if the jackpot FF effect is executed while the ball out error notification is being executed, the ball out error notification is continued),
A specific display (jackpot title display (BONUS, Yume Yume BONUS, etc.)) corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the specific display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed superimposed on the specific display (as shown in FIG. 8-57, if a ball-out error occurs while a jackpot title display (the letters "BONUS") is being displayed, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the jackpot title display),
The specific display is composed of multiple characters (as shown in FIG. 8-57, the jackpot title display "BONUS" is composed of two or more characters),
When the error display is displayed superimposed on the specific display, the error display is displayed superimposed on at least two or more characters of the specific display (as shown in Figure 8-57, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the two characters "US" of the jackpot title display), a gaming machine.

According to this configuration, by ending the ongoing warning when the fanfare effect is executed, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the operating means using the first operating method without interfering with the fanfare effect.
Furthermore, by continuing to notify an error that is currently being executed when the fanfare effect is being performed, it becomes easier for players to recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, and an appropriate error notification can be given to the player.
As a result, when the fanfare effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

In addition, if an error occurs while a special display is being displayed, the error display will be superimposed on the special display, making it easier for players who were paying attention to the special display to recognize the error display, allowing them to continue playing smoothly after the error occurs.

The gaming machine of means 21 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
and an operation means (a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of performing an operation related to the launch of a game medium (a game ball),
The paths along which the game media flow down include a first path (left-hand path) and a second path (right-hand path) different from the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in a first operation manner (left-handed hit), the game medium is launched along the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation manner (right hit), the game medium is launched along the second path,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation method while the operation means is in the normal state, a warning (instruction to hit left abnormally) can be issued to notify the player to operate the operation means in the first operation method.
It is possible to execute an error notification (error notification (bulb out error notification, etc.)) to notify that an error has occurred,
When the fanfare effect is executed while the warning is being executed, the warning is terminated (as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the abnormal left hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left hit instruction is terminated),
When the fanfare effect is executed while the error notification is being executed, the error notification is continued (as shown in FIG. 8-21, even if the jackpot FF effect is executed while the ball out error notification is being executed, the ball out error notification is continued),
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, an operation prompting display (normal right-hit instruction (first A instruction image, first B instruction image) "right-hit") suggesting an operation method in the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the operation prompting display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed superimposed on the operation prompting display (as shown in FIG. 8-57, if a bulb-out error occurs while the first A instruction image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the first A instruction image),
The operation prompting display is composed of a plurality of characters (as shown in FIG. 8-57, the first A instruction image “Right Hit” is composed of two or more characters),
When the error display is displayed superimposed on the operation prompt display, the error display is displayed superimposed on at least two or more characters of the operation prompt display (as shown in Figure 8-57, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the three characters ``hit right'' of the first A instruction image), gaming machine.

According to this configuration, by ending the ongoing warning when the fanfare effect is executed, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the operating means using the first operating method without interfering with the fanfare effect.
Furthermore, by continuing to notify an error that is currently being executed when the fanfare effect is being performed, it becomes easier for players to recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, and an appropriate error notification can be given to the player.
As a result, when the fanfare effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

In addition, if an error occurs while an operation prompt is being displayed, the error prompt will be superimposed on the operation prompt, making it easier for players who have been paying attention to the operation prompt to recognize the error display, allowing them to continue playing smoothly after the error occurs.

The gaming machine of means 22 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
and an operation means (a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of performing an operation related to the launch of a game medium (a game ball),
The paths along which the game media flow down include a first path (left-hand path) and a second path (right-hand path) different from the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in a first operation manner (left-handed hit), the game medium is launched along the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation manner (right hit), the game medium is launched along the second path,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation method while the operation means is in the normal state, a warning (instruction to hit left abnormally) can be issued to notify the player to operate the operation means in the first operation method.
It is possible to execute an error notification (error notification (bulb out error notification, etc.)) to notify that an error has occurred,
When the fanfare effect is executed while the warning is being executed, the warning is terminated (as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the abnormal left hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left hit instruction is terminated),
When the fanfare effect is executed while the error notification is being executed, the error notification is continued (as shown in FIG. 8-21, even if the jackpot FF effect is executed while the ball out error notification is being executed, the ball out error notification is continued),
In connection with the end of the advantageous state, an addiction prevention display (addiction prevention image) for preventing addiction to the game can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the anti-addiction display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-addiction display (as shown in Figure 8-65, if a ball-out error occurs while the anti-addiction image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-addiction image).

According to this configuration, by ending the ongoing warning when the fanfare effect is executed, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the operating means using the first operating method without interfering with the fanfare effect.
Furthermore, by continuing to notify an error that is currently being executed when the fanfare effect is being performed, it becomes easier for players to recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, and an appropriate error notification can be given to the player.
As a result, when the fanfare effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

In addition, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention display is displayed, the error display is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention display, allowing the player to be aware that an error has occurred while still being warned to prevent addiction to the game.

The gaming machine of means 23 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
An operation means (a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of performing an operation related to the launch of a game medium (a game ball);
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium (game ball) can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
and a game value providing means (CPU 103 capable of providing prize balls in jackpot RD control) capable of providing game value when the game medium enters the variable winning means when the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The paths along which the game media flow down include a first path (left-hand path) and a second path (right-hand path) different from the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in a first operation manner (left-handed hit), the game medium is launched along the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation manner (right hit), the game medium is launched along the second path,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation method while the operation means is in the normal state, a warning (instruction to hit left abnormally) can be issued to notify the player to operate the operation means in the first operation method.
It is possible to execute an error notification (error notification (bulb out error notification, etc.)) to notify that an error has occurred,
When the fanfare effect is executed while the warning is being executed, the warning is terminated (as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the abnormal left hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left hit instruction is terminated),
When the fanfare effect is executed while the error notification is being executed, the error notification is continued (as shown in FIG. 8-21, even if the jackpot FF effect is executed while the ball out error notification is being executed, the ball out error notification is continued),
When a predetermined amount of game media enters the variable winning means while the round control means is controlling the variable winning means to the first state in one of the multiple round games, the round control means changes the variable winning means to the second state, thereby ending the one round game (when 10 game balls enter the special variable winning ball device 7 in the nth jackpot round control, the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the jackpot round control is ended).
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute an update of the amount of the game value awarded by the game medium entering the variable winning means (an acquired prize ball update effect),
When the game medium enters the variable winning means, the award amount can be updated for a first period (as shown in FIG. 8-68, the winning ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds),
In the final round of the multiple rounds of play, based on a predetermined amount of the game media entering the variable winning means, after a second period has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the first state to the second state, a specific display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after ending the jackpot RD control of the final round and executing a jackpot ED performance (Part 1A, Part 1B, Part 1C) in which an image of the total number of winning balls is displayed for 4.5 seconds, a jackpot ED performance (Part 2A, Part 3B, Part 2C) informing that the jackpot has ended is executed),
A gaming machine, wherein the second period is longer than the first period (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds).

According to this configuration, by ending the ongoing warning when the fanfare effect is executed, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the operating means using the first operating method without interfering with the fanfare effect.
Furthermore, by continuing to notify an error that is currently being executed when the fanfare effect is being performed, it becomes easier for players to recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, and an appropriate error notification can be given to the player.
As a result, when the fanfare effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, in the final round of multiple rounds of play, after the award amount is updated based on a predetermined amount of gaming media entering the variable winning means, a specific display indicating that the advantageous state has ended is displayed, allowing the player to confirm the award amount update and preventing dissatisfaction with the award amount update while in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 24 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
An operation means (a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of performing an operation related to the launch of a game medium (a game ball);
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
and a round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game that controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The paths along which the game media flow down include a first path (left-hand path) and a second path (right-hand path) different from the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in a first operation manner (left-handed hit), the game medium is launched along the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation manner (right hit), the game medium is launched along the second path,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation method while the operation means is in the normal state, a warning (instruction to hit left abnormally) can be issued to notify the player to operate the operation means in the first operation method.
It is possible to execute an error notification (error notification (bulb out error notification, etc.)) to notify that an error has occurred,
When the fanfare effect is executed while the warning is being executed, the warning is terminated (as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the abnormal left hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left hit instruction is terminated),
When the fanfare effect is executed while the error notification is being executed, the error notification is continued (as shown in FIG. 8-21, even if the jackpot FF effect is executed while the ball out error notification is being executed, the ball out error notification is continued),
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control it to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
When controlled in the normal state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state is shorter than the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state (as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) as shown in Figure 8-56 is shorter than the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode)).

According to this configuration, by ending the ongoing warning when the fanfare effect is executed, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the operating means using the first operating method without interfering with the fanfare effect.
Furthermore, by continuing to notify an error that is currently being executed when the fanfare effect is being performed, it becomes easier for players to recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, and an appropriate error notification can be given to the player.
As a result, when the fanfare effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

In addition, in the special state, variable displays are more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the period from when a specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of specific identification information to when a round of play begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of gameplay in the special state even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the special state.

The gaming machine of means 25 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
An operation means (a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of performing an operation related to the launch of a game medium (a game ball);
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
and a round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The paths along which the game media flow down include a first path (left-hand path) and a second path (right-hand path) different from the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in a first operation manner (left-handed hit), the game medium is launched along the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation manner (right hit), the game medium is launched along the second path,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation method while the operation means is in the normal state, a warning (instruction to hit left abnormally) can be issued to notify the player to operate the operation means in the first operation method.
It is possible to execute an error notification (error notification (bulb out error notification, etc.)) to notify that an error has occurred,
When the fanfare effect is executed while the warning is being executed, the warning is terminated (as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the abnormal left hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left hit instruction is terminated),
When the fanfare effect is executed while the error notification is being executed, the error notification is continued (as shown in FIG. 8-21, even if the jackpot FF effect is executed while the ball out error notification is being executed, the ball out error notification is continued),
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it can be controlled to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
In the last round of play among the plurality of rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the normal state, the period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable is shorter than the period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable in the last round of play among the plurality of rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the special state (as shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) as shown in Figure 8-64 is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds, 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode)).

According to this configuration, by ending the ongoing warning when the fanfare effect is executed, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the operating means using the first operating method without interfering with the fanfare effect.
Furthermore, by continuing to notify an error that is currently being executed when the fanfare effect is being performed, it becomes easier for players to recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, and an appropriate error notification can be given to the player.
As a result, when the fanfare effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

In addition, in the special state, variable display is more easily executed than in the normal state, and the period from the end of the last round of play until variable display of specific identification information can be executed is shorter than in the normal state, which makes the speed of gameplay in the special state even faster and reduces stress for the player when playing in the special state.

The gaming machine of means 26 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
An operation means (a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of performing an operation related to the launch of a game medium (a game ball);
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
and a round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The paths along which the gaming media flow down include a first path (left-hand path) and a second path (right-hand path) different from the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in a first operation manner (left-handed hit), the game medium is launched along the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation manner (right hit), the game medium is launched along the second path,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation method while the operation means is in the normal state, a warning (instruction to hit left abnormally) can be issued to notify the player to operate the operation means in the first operation method.
It is possible to execute an error notification (error notification (bulb out error notification, etc.)) to notify that an error has occurred,
When the fanfare effect is executed while the warning is being executed, the warning is terminated (as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the abnormal left hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left hit instruction is terminated),
When the fanfare effect is executed while the error notification is being executed, the error notification is continued (as shown in FIG. 8-21, even if the jackpot FF effect is executed while the ball out error notification is being executed, the ball out error notification is continued),
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control it to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
In the last round of play among the multiple rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the normal state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means changes to the first state when controlled in the normal state is shorter than the period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable (as shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) occurring in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds, 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) occurring in the normal state (normal mode)).
In the last round of play among the multiple rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the special state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable is shorter when controlled in the special state (as shown in Figure 8-56, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) is shorter than the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) as shown in Figure 8-64).

According to this configuration, by ending the ongoing warning when the fanfare effect is executed, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the operating means using the first operating method without interfering with the fanfare effect.
Furthermore, by continuing to notify an error that is currently being executed when the fanfare effect is being performed, it becomes easier for players to recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, and an appropriate error notification can be given to the player.
As a result, when the fanfare effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

In addition, in both the normal and special states, the period from when the final round of play ends until the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable is shorter than the period from when the final round of play ends until the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable. This shortens the period until control is achieved in an advantageous state and allows the player to enjoy the afterglow of the end of the advantageous state for even longer.

The gaming machine of means 27 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
An operation means (a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of performing an operation related to the launch of a game medium (a game ball);
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
and a round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The paths along which the game media flow down include a first path (left-hand path) and a second path (right-hand path) different from the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in a first operation manner (left-handed hit), the game medium is launched along the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation manner (right hit), the game medium is launched along the second path,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation method while the operation means is in the normal state, a warning (instruction to hit left abnormally) can be issued to notify the player to operate the operation means in the first operation method.
It is possible to execute an error notification (error notification (bulb out error notification, etc.)) to notify that an error has occurred,
When the fanfare effect is executed while the warning is being executed, the warning is terminated (as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the abnormal left hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left hit instruction is terminated),
When the fanfare effect is executed while the error notification is being executed, the error notification is continued (as shown in FIG. 8-21, even if the jackpot FF effect is executed while the ball out error notification is being executed, the ball out error notification is continued),
During the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information until when the variable winning means changes to the first state, it is possible to display a title display corresponding to the advantageous state and, after the display of the title display has ended, an operation prompt display suggesting an operation method in the advantageous state (as shown in FIG. 8-54, in the jackpot FF presentation, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a jackpot FF presentation (part 1): a jackpot title display (such as "BONUS"), and a jackpot FF presentation (part 2): a first instruction image (such as a 1A instruction image) instructing a right hit in a jackpot game),
A gaming machine in which the period during which the title display is displayed is longer than the period during which the operation prompt display is displayed (as shown in Figure 8-55, etc., the execution period (4 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2)).

According to this configuration, by ending the ongoing warning when the fanfare effect is executed, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the operating means using the first operating method without interfering with the fanfare effect.
Furthermore, by continuing to notify an error that is currently being executed when the fanfare effect is being performed, it becomes easier for players to recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, and an appropriate error notification can be given to the player.
As a result, when the fanfare effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, by making the period during which the title display is displayed longer than the period during which the operation prompt display is displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the title display, and to emphasize to the player that the game is being controlled to an advantageous state.
Furthermore, by displaying the operation prompt display after the title display has finished being displayed, it is possible to make the player who has been paying attention to the title display continue to pay attention to the operation prompt display.

The gaming machine of means 28 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
An operation means (a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of performing an operation related to the launch of a game medium (a game ball);
Display means (image display device 5);
A performance means (first role, second role) that can be arranged at a position superimposed on the display means and is used for performance;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance,
The paths along which the game media flow down include a first path (left-hand path) and a second path (right-hand path) different from the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in a first operation manner (left-handed hit), the game medium is launched along the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation manner (right hit), the game medium is launched along the second path,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation method while the operation means is in the normal state, a warning (instruction to hit left abnormally) can be issued to notify the player to operate the operation means in the first operation method.
It is possible to execute an error notification (error notification (bulb out error notification, etc.)) to notify that an error has occurred,
When the fanfare effect is executed while the warning is being executed, the warning is terminated (as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the abnormal left hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left hit instruction is terminated),
When the fanfare effect is executed while the error notification is being executed, the error notification is continued (as shown in FIG. 8-21, even if the jackpot FF effect is executed while the ball out error notification is being executed, the ball out error notification is continued),
When controlled to the advantageous state, a title display (jackpot title display) corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
The title display is displayed at a display position and size that reduces the visibility of a part of the title display by the effect means (as shown in Figure 8-70 (A) , when the first and second roles are provided and the jackpot FF effect (first part) is executed, the visibility of a part (in this example, the bottom left part of the character "Yume" and the top left part of the character "B") of the jackpot title display (in this example, the characters "Yume Yume Bonus") is reduced by the role),
The error display is displayed by the presentation means at a display position and size that does not reduce the visibility of the error display (as shown in Figure 8-70 (A), even when the first and second roles are provided, neither role is installed so as to overlap the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image is not reduced by the roles), gaming machine.

According to this configuration, by ending the ongoing warning when the fanfare effect is executed, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the operating means using the first operating method without interfering with the fanfare effect.
Furthermore, by continuing to notify an error that is currently being executed when the fanfare effect is being performed, it becomes easier for players to recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, and an appropriate error notification can be given to the player.
As a result, when the fanfare effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

In addition, by positioning the presentation means used in the presentation so that they overlap the display means, the player can be drawn to the display means and presentation means when the presentation is being executed, and by displaying part of the title display celebrating the player being controlled to an advantageous state in a position and size that reduces its visibility due to the presentation means, the impression made on the player when the player is controlled to an advantageous state can be strengthened.
On the other hand, since the error display needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, the display position and size are set so that visibility is not reduced by the presentation means, thereby allowing the player to be accurately notified of the occurrence of an error.

The gaming machine of means 29 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
An operation means (a ball-hitting operation handle 30) capable of performing an operation related to the launch of a game medium (a game ball);
Display means (image display device 5);
A performance means (first role, second role) that can be arranged at a position superimposed on the display means and is used for performance;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance,
The paths along which the game media flow down include a first path (left-hand path) and a second path (right-hand path) different from the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in a first operation manner (left-handed hit), the game medium is launched along the first path,
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation manner (right hit), the game medium is launched along the second path,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a fanfare effect (jackpot FF effect) can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the player operates the operation means in the second operation method while the operation means is in the normal state, a warning (instruction to hit left abnormally) can be issued to notify the player to operate the operation means in the first operation method.
It is possible to execute an error notification (error notification (bulb out error notification, etc.)) to notify that an error has occurred,
When the fanfare effect is executed while the warning is being executed, the warning is terminated (as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the jackpot FF effect is executed while the abnormal left hit instruction is being executed, the abnormal left hit instruction is terminated),
When the fanfare effect is executed while the error notification is being executed, the error notification is continued (as shown in FIG. 8-21, even if the jackpot FF effect is executed while the ball out error notification is being executed, the ball out error notification is continued),
When controlled to the advantageous state, an operation prompting display (a first instruction image (a firstA instruction image, etc.)) suggesting an operation method in the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
The operation prompt display is displayed at a display position and size that reduces the visibility of a part of the operation prompt display by the presentation means (as shown in Figure 8-70 (B) , when the first and second role devices are provided and the jackpot FF presentation (second part) is executed, the role devices reduce the visibility of a part (in this example, the lower part of the right-pointing arrow object and the lower part of the character "Hit") of the first instruction image (in this example, the right-pointing arrow object and the character "Hit");
The error display is displayed by the presentation means at a display position and size that does not reduce the visibility of the error display (as shown in Figure 8-70 (B), even when the first and second roles are provided, neither role is installed so as to overlap the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image is not reduced by the roles), gaming machine.

According to this configuration, by ending the ongoing warning when the fanfare effect is executed, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the operating means using the first operating method without interfering with the fanfare effect.
Furthermore, by continuing to notify an error that is currently being executed when the fanfare effect is being performed, it becomes easier for players to recognize that an error has occurred even when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, and an appropriate error notification can be given to the player.
As a result, when the fanfare effect is executed, the player can be appropriately notified.

In addition, by positioning the presentation means used in the presentation so that they overlap the display means, the player can be drawn to the display means and presentation means when the presentation is being executed, and by displaying a portion of the operation prompt display that suggests an operation method in an advantageous state at a display position and size that reduces visibility by the presentation means, the player is controlled to an advantageous state and the impression made when the operation prompt display is displayed can be strengthened.
On the other hand, since the error display needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, the display position and size are set so that visibility is not reduced by the presentation means, thereby allowing the player to be accurately notified of the occurrence of an error.

The gaming machine of means 30 includes:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing performance is provided,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
In connection with the end of the advantageous state, an addiction prevention display (addiction prevention image) for preventing addiction to the game can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the anti-slip display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip display (as shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball-out error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip image),
A specific display (jackpot title display (BONUS, Yume Yume BONUS, etc.)) corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the specific display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed superimposed on the specific display (as shown in FIG. 8-57, if a ball-out error occurs while a jackpot title display (the letters "BONUS") is being displayed, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the jackpot title display),
The specific display is composed of multiple characters (as shown in FIG. 8-57, the jackpot title display "BONUS" is composed of two or more characters),
When the error display is displayed superimposed on the specific display, the error display is displayed superimposed on at least two or more characters of the specific display (as shown in Figure 8-57, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the two characters "US" of the jackpot title display), a gaming machine.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention display is displayed, the error display is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention display, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while still issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

In addition, if an error occurs while a special display is being displayed, the error display will be superimposed on the special display, making it easier for players who were paying attention to the special display to recognize the error display, allowing them to continue playing smoothly after the error occurs.

The gaming machine of means 31 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing performance is provided,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
In connection with the end of the advantageous state, an addiction prevention display (addiction prevention image) for preventing addiction to the game can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the anti-slip display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip display (as shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball-out error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip image),
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, an operation prompting display (normal right-hit instruction (first A instruction image, first B instruction image) "right-hit") suggesting an operation method in the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the operation prompting display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed superimposed on the operation prompting display (as shown in FIG. 8-57, if a bulb-out error occurs while the first A instruction image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the first A instruction image),
The operation prompting display is composed of a plurality of characters (as shown in FIG. 8-57, the first A instruction image “Right Hit” is composed of two or more characters),
When the error display is displayed superimposed on the operation prompt display, the error display is displayed superimposed on at least two or more characters of the operation prompt display (as shown in Figure 8-57, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the three characters ``hit right'' of the first A instruction image), gaming machine.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention display is displayed, the error display is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention display, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while still issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

In addition, if an error occurs while an operation prompt is being displayed, the error prompt will be superimposed on the operation prompt, making it easier for players who have been paying attention to the operation prompt to recognize the error display, allowing them to continue playing smoothly after the error occurs.

The gaming machine of means 32 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium (game ball) can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
and a game value providing means (CPU 103 capable of providing prize balls in jackpot RD control) capable of providing game value when the game medium enters the variable winning means when the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
In connection with the end of the advantageous state, an addiction prevention display (addiction prevention image) for preventing addiction to the game can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the anti-slip display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip display (as shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball-out error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip image),
When a predetermined amount of game media enters the variable winning means while the round control means is controlling the variable winning means to the first state in one of the multiple round games, the round control means changes the variable winning means to the second state, thereby ending the one round game (when 10 game balls enter the special variable winning ball device 7 in the nth jackpot round control, the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the jackpot round control is ended).
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute an update of the amount of the game value awarded by the game medium entering the variable winning means (an acquired prize ball update effect),
When the game medium enters the variable winning means, the award amount can be updated for a first period (as shown in FIG. 8-68, the winning ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds),
In the final round of the multiple rounds of play, based on a predetermined amount of the game media entering the variable winning means, after a second period has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the first state to the second state, a specific display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after ending the jackpot RD control of the final round and executing a jackpot ED performance (Part 1A, Part 1B, Part 1C) in which an image of the total number of winning balls is displayed for 4.5 seconds, a jackpot ED performance (Part 2A, Part 3B, Part 2C) informing that the jackpot has ended is executed),
A gaming machine, wherein the second period is longer than the first period (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds).

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention display is displayed, the error display is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention display, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while still issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

Furthermore, in the final round of multiple rounds of play, after the award amount is updated based on a predetermined amount of gaming media entering the variable winning means, a specific display indicating that the advantageous state has ended is displayed, allowing the player to confirm the award amount update and preventing dissatisfaction with the award amount update while in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 33 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
and a round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game that controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
In connection with the end of the advantageous state, an addiction prevention display (addiction prevention image) for preventing addiction to the game can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the anti-slip display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip display (as shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball-out error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip image),
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control it to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
When controlled in the normal state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state is shorter than the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state (as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) as shown in Figure 8-56 is shorter than the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode)).

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention display is displayed, the error display is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention display, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while still issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

In addition, in the special state, variable displays are more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the period from when a specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of specific identification information to when a round of play begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of gameplay in the special state even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the special state.

The gaming machine of means 34 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
and a round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
In connection with the end of the advantageous state, an addiction prevention display (addiction prevention image) for preventing addiction to the game can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the anti-slip display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip display (as shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball-out error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip image),
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it can be controlled to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
In the last round of play among the plurality of rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the normal state, the period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable is shorter than the period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable in the last round of play among the plurality of rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the special state (as shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) as shown in Figure 8-64 is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds, 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode)).

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention display is displayed, the error display is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention display, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while still issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

In addition, in the special state, variable display is more easily executed than in the normal state, and the period from the end of the last round of play until variable display of specific identification information can be executed is shorter than in the normal state, which makes the speed of gameplay in the special state even faster and reduces stress for the player when playing in the special state.

The gaming machine of means 35 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
and a round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
In connection with the end of the advantageous state, an addiction prevention display (addiction prevention image) for preventing addiction to the game can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the anti-slip display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip display (as shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball-out error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip image),
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it can be controlled to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
In the last round of play among the multiple rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the normal state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means changes to the first state when controlled in the normal state is shorter than the period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable (as shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) occurring in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds, 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) occurring in the normal state (normal mode)).
In the last round of play among the multiple rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the special state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable is shorter when controlled in the special state (as shown in Figure 8-56, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) is shorter than the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) as shown in Figure 8-64).

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention display is displayed, the error display is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention display, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while still issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

In addition, in both the normal and special states, the period from when the final round of play ends until the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable is shorter than the period from when the final round of play ends until the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable. This shortens the period until control is achieved in an advantageous state and allows the player to enjoy the afterglow of the end of the advantageous state for even longer.

The gaming machine of means 36 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
and a round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
In connection with the end of the advantageous state, an addiction prevention display (addiction prevention image) for preventing addiction to the game can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the anti-slip display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip display (as shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball-out error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip image),
During the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information until when the variable winning means changes to the first state, it is possible to display a title display corresponding to the advantageous state and, after the display of the title display has ended, an operation prompt display suggesting an operation method in the advantageous state (as shown in FIG. 8-54, in the jackpot FF presentation, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a jackpot FF presentation (part 1): a jackpot title display (such as "BONUS"), and a jackpot FF presentation (part 2): a first instruction image (such as a 1A instruction image) instructing a right hit in a jackpot game),
A gaming machine in which the period during which the title display is displayed is longer than the period during which the operation prompt display is displayed (as shown in Figure 8-55, etc., the execution period (4 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2)).

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention display is displayed, the error display is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention display, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while still issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

Furthermore, by making the period during which the title display is displayed longer than the period during which the operation prompt display is displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the title display, and to emphasize to the player that the game is being controlled to an advantageous state.
Furthermore, by displaying the operation prompt display after the title display has finished being displayed, it is possible to make the player who has been paying attention to the title display continue to pay attention to the operation prompt display.

The gaming machine of means 37 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Display means (image display device 5);
and a performance means (first role device, second role device) that can be arranged at a position superimposed on the display means and is used for performance,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
In connection with the end of the advantageous state, an addiction prevention display (addiction prevention image) for preventing addiction to the game can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the anti-slip display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip display (as shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball-out error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip image),
When controlled to the advantageous state, a title display (jackpot title display) corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
The title display is displayed at a display position and size that reduces the visibility of a part of the title display by the effect means (as shown in Figure 8-70 (A) , when the first and second roles are provided and the jackpot FF effect (first part) is executed, the visibility of a part (in this example, the bottom left part of the character "Yume" and the top left part of the character "B") of the jackpot title display (in this example, the characters "Yume Yume Bonus") is reduced by the role),
The error display is displayed by the presentation means at a display position and size that does not reduce the visibility of the error display (as shown in Figure 8-70 (A), even when the first and second roles are provided, neither role is installed so as to overlap the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image is not reduced by the roles), gaming machine.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention display is displayed, the error display is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention display, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while still issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

In addition, by positioning the presentation means used in the presentation so that they overlap the display means, the player can be drawn to the display means and presentation means when the presentation is being executed, and by displaying part of the title display celebrating the player being controlled to an advantageous state in a position and size that reduces its visibility due to the presentation means, the impression made on the player when the player is controlled to an advantageous state can be strengthened.
On the other hand, since the error display needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, the display position and size are set so that visibility is not reduced by the presentation means, thereby allowing the player to be accurately notified of the occurrence of an error.

The gaming machine of means 38 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Display means (image display device 5);
and a performance means (first role device, second role device) that can be arranged at a position superimposed on the display means and is used for performance,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
In connection with the end of the advantageous state, an addiction prevention display (addiction prevention image) for preventing addiction to the game can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the anti-slip display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip display (as shown in FIG. 8-65, if a ball-out error occurs while the anti-slip image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed without being superimposed on the anti-slip image),
When controlled to the advantageous state, an operation prompting display (a first instruction image (a firstA instruction image, etc.)) suggesting an operation method in the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
The operation prompt display is displayed at a display position and size that reduces the visibility of a part of the operation prompt display by the presentation means (as shown in Figure 8-70 (B) , when the first and second role devices are provided and the jackpot FF presentation (second part) is executed, the role devices reduce the visibility of a part (in this example, the lower part of the right-pointing arrow object and the lower part of the character "Hit") of the first instruction image (in this example, the right-pointing arrow object and the character "Hit");
The error display is displayed by the presentation means at a display position and size that does not reduce the visibility of the error display (as shown in Figure 8-70 (B), even when the first and second roles are provided, neither role is installed so as to overlap the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image is not reduced by the roles), gaming machine.

With this configuration, if an error occurs while the addiction prevention display is displayed, the error display is displayed so as not to overlap with the addiction prevention display, thereby making the player aware that an error has occurred while still issuing a warning to prevent addiction to the game.

In addition, by positioning the presentation means used in the presentation so that they overlap the display means, the player can be drawn to the display means and presentation means when the presentation is being executed, and by displaying a portion of the operation prompt display that suggests an operation method in an advantageous state at a display position and size that reduces visibility by the presentation means, the player is controlled to an advantageous state and the impression made when the operation prompt display is displayed can be strengthened.
On the other hand, since the error display needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, the display position and size are set so that visibility is not reduced by the presentation means, thereby allowing the player to be accurately notified of the occurrence of an error.

The gaming machine of means 39 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium (game ball) can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
and a game value providing means (CPU 103 capable of providing prize balls in jackpot RD control) capable of providing game value when the game medium enters the variable winning means when the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When a predetermined amount of game media enters the variable winning means while the round control means is controlling the variable winning means to the first state in one of the multiple round games, the round control means changes the variable winning means to the second state, thereby ending the one round game (when 10 game balls enter the special variable winning ball device 7 in the nth jackpot round control, the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the jackpot round control is ended).
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute an update of the amount of the game value awarded by the game medium entering the variable winning means (an acquired prize ball update effect),
When the game medium enters the variable winning means, the award amount can be updated for a first period (as shown in FIG. 8-68, the winning ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds),
In the final round of the multiple rounds of play, based on a predetermined amount of the game media entering the variable winning means, after a second period has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the first state to the second state, a specific display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after ending the jackpot RD control of the final round and executing a jackpot ED performance (Part 1A, Part 1B, Part 1C) in which an image of the total number of winning balls is displayed for 4.5 seconds, a jackpot ED performance (Part 2A, Part 3B, Part 2C) informing that the jackpot has ended is executed),
The second period is longer than the first period (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds),
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
A specific display (jackpot title display (BONUS, Yume Yume BONUS, etc.)) corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the specific display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed superimposed on the specific display (as shown in FIG. 8-57, if a ball-out error occurs while a jackpot title display (the letters "BONUS") is being displayed, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the jackpot title display),
The specific display is composed of multiple characters (as shown in FIG. 8-57, the jackpot title display "BONUS" is composed of two or more characters),
When the error display is displayed superimposed on the specific display, the error display is displayed superimposed on at least two or more characters of the specific display (as shown in Figure 8-57, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the two characters "US" of the jackpot title display), a gaming machine.

With this configuration, in the final round of multiple rounds of play, after the award amount is updated based on a predetermined amount of gaming media entering the variable winning means, a specific display indicating the end of the advantageous state is displayed, allowing the player to confirm the award amount update and preventing dissatisfaction with the award amount update while in an advantageous state.

In addition, if an error occurs while a special display is being displayed, the error display will be superimposed on the special display, making it easier for players who were paying attention to the special display to recognize the error display, allowing them to continue playing smoothly after the error occurs.

The gaming machine of means 40 includes:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a normal state and an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal state,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium (game ball) can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
and a game value providing means (CPU 103 capable of providing prize balls in jackpot RD control) capable of providing game value when the game medium enters the variable winning means when the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When a predetermined amount of game media enters the variable winning means while the round control means is controlling the variable winning means to the first state in one of the multiple round games, the round control means changes the variable winning means to the second state, thereby ending the one round game (when 10 game balls enter the special variable winning ball device 7 in the nth jackpot round control, the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the jackpot round control is ended).
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute an update of the amount of the game value awarded by the game medium entering the variable winning means (an acquired prize ball update effect),
When the game medium enters the variable winning means, the award amount can be updated for a first period (as shown in FIG. 8-68, the winning ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds),
In the final round of the multiple rounds of play, based on a predetermined amount of the game media entering the variable winning means, after a second period has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the first state to the second state, a specific display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after ending the jackpot RD control of the final round and executing a jackpot ED performance (Part 1A, Part 1B, Part 1C) in which an image of the total number of winning balls is displayed for 4.5 seconds, a jackpot ED performance (Part 2A, Part 3B, Part 2C) informing that the jackpot has ended is executed),
The second period is longer than the first period (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds),
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, an operation prompting display (normal right-hit instruction (first A instruction image, first B instruction image) "right-hit") suggesting an operation method in the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the operation prompting display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed superimposed on the operation prompting display (as shown in FIG. 8-57, if a bulb-out error occurs while the first A instruction image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the first A instruction image),
The operation prompting display is composed of a plurality of characters (as shown in FIG. 8-57, the first A instruction image “Right Hit” is composed of two or more characters),
When the error display is displayed superimposed on the operation prompt display, the error display is displayed superimposed on at least two or more characters of the operation prompt display (as shown in Figure 8-57, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the three characters ``hit right'' of the first A instruction image), gaming machine.

With this configuration, in the final round of multiple rounds of play, after the award amount is updated based on a predetermined amount of gaming media entering the variable winning means, a specific display indicating the end of the advantageous state is displayed, allowing the player to confirm the award amount update and preventing dissatisfaction with the award amount update while in an advantageous state.

In addition, if an error occurs while an operation prompt is being displayed, the error prompt will be superimposed on the operation prompt, making it easier for players who have been paying attention to the operation prompt to recognize the error display, allowing them to continue playing smoothly after the error occurs.

The gaming machine of means 41 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium (game ball) can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
and a game value providing means (CPU 103 capable of providing prize balls in jackpot RD control) capable of providing game value when the game medium enters the variable winning means when the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When a predetermined amount of game media enters the variable winning means while the round control means is controlling the variable winning means to the first state in one of the multiple round games, the round control means changes the variable winning means to the second state, thereby ending the one round game (when 10 game balls enter the special variable winning ball device 7 in the nth jackpot round control, the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the jackpot round control is ended).
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute an update of the amount of the game value awarded by the game medium entering the variable winning means (an acquired prize ball update effect),
When the game medium enters the variable winning means, the award amount can be updated for a first period (as shown in FIG. 8-68, the winning ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds),
In the final round of the multiple rounds of play, based on a predetermined amount of the game media entering the variable winning means, after a second period has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the first state to the second state, a specific display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after ending the jackpot RD control of the final round and executing a jackpot ED performance (Part 1A, Part 1B, Part 1C) in which an image of the total number of winning balls is displayed for 4.5 seconds, a jackpot ED performance (Part 2A, Part 3B, Part 2C) informing that the jackpot has ended is executed),
The second period is longer than the first period (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds),
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control it to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
When controlled in the normal state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state is shorter than the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state (as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) as shown in Figure 8-56 is shorter than the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode)).

With this configuration, in the final round of multiple rounds of play, after the award amount is updated based on a predetermined amount of gaming media entering the variable winning means, a specific display indicating the end of the advantageous state is displayed, allowing the player to confirm the award amount update and preventing dissatisfaction with the award amount update while in an advantageous state.

In addition, in the special state, variable displays are more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the period from when a specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of specific identification information to when a round of play begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of gameplay in the special state even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the special state.

The gaming machine of means 42 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium (game ball) can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
and a game value providing means (CPU 103 capable of providing prize balls in jackpot RD control) capable of providing game value when the game medium enters the variable winning means when the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When a predetermined amount of game media enters the variable winning means while the round control means is controlling the variable winning means to the first state in one of the multiple round games, the round control means changes the variable winning means to the second state, thereby ending the one round game (when 10 game balls enter the special variable winning ball device 7 in the nth jackpot round control, the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the jackpot round control is ended).
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute an update of the amount of the game value awarded by the game medium entering the variable winning means (an acquired prize ball update effect),
When the game medium enters the variable winning means, the award amount can be updated for a first period (as shown in FIG. 8-68, the winning ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds),
In the final round of the multiple rounds of play, based on a predetermined amount of the game media entering the variable winning means, after a second period has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the first state to the second state, a specific display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after ending the jackpot RD control of the final round and executing a jackpot ED performance (Part 1A, Part 1B, Part 1C) in which an image of the total number of winning balls is displayed for 4.5 seconds, a jackpot ED performance (Part 2A, Part 3B, Part 2C) informing that the jackpot has ended is executed),
The second period is longer than the first period (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds),
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it can be controlled to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
In the last round of play among the plurality of rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the normal state, the period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable is shorter than the period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable in the last round of play among the plurality of rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the special state (as shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) as shown in Figure 8-64 is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds, 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode)).

With this configuration, in the final round of multiple rounds of play, after the award amount is updated based on a predetermined amount of gaming media entering the variable winning means, a specific display indicating the end of the advantageous state is displayed, allowing the player to confirm the award amount update and preventing dissatisfaction with the award amount update while in an advantageous state.

In addition, in the special state, variable display is more easily executed than in the normal state, and the period from the end of the last round of play until variable display of specific identification information can be executed is shorter than in the normal state, which makes the speed of gameplay in the special state even faster and reduces stress for the player when playing in the special state.

The gaming machine of means 43 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium (game ball) can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
and a game value awarding means (CPU 103 capable of awarding prize balls in jackpot RD control) capable of awarding game value when the game medium enters the variable winning means when the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When a predetermined amount of game media enters the variable winning means while the round control means is controlling the variable winning means to the first state in one of the multiple round games, the round control means changes the variable winning means to the second state, thereby ending the one round game (when 10 game balls enter the special variable winning ball device 7 in the nth jackpot round control, the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the jackpot round control is ended).
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute an update of the amount of the game value awarded by the game medium entering the variable winning means (an acquired prize ball update effect),
When the game medium enters the variable winning means, the award amount can be updated for a first period (as shown in FIG. 8-68, the winning ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds),
In the final round of the multiple rounds of play, based on a predetermined amount of the game media entering the variable winning means, after a second period has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the first state to the second state, a specific display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after ending the jackpot RD control of the final round and executing a jackpot ED performance (Part 1A, Part 1B, Part 1C) in which an image of the total number of winning balls is displayed for 4.5 seconds, a jackpot ED performance (Part 2A, Part 3B, Part 2C) informing that the jackpot has ended is executed),
The second period is longer than the first period (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds),
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it can be controlled to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
In the last round of play among the multiple rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the normal state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means changes to the first state when controlled in the normal state is shorter than the period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable (as shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) occurring in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds, 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) occurring in the normal state (normal mode)).
In the last round of play among the multiple rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the special state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable is shorter when controlled in the special state (as shown in Figure 8-56, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) is shorter than the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) as shown in Figure 8-64).

With this configuration, in the final round of multiple rounds of play, after the award amount is updated based on a predetermined amount of gaming media entering the variable winning means, a specific display indicating the end of the advantageous state is displayed, allowing the player to confirm the award amount update and preventing dissatisfaction with the award amount update while in an advantageous state.

In addition, in both the normal and special states, the period from when the final round of play ends until the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable is shorter than the period from when the final round of play ends until the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable. This shortens the period until control is achieved in an advantageous state and allows the player to enjoy the afterglow of the end of the advantageous state for even longer.

The gaming machine of means 44 includes:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium (game ball) can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
and a game value providing means (CPU 103 capable of providing prize balls in jackpot RD control) capable of providing game value when the game medium enters the variable winning means when the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
When a predetermined amount of game media enters the variable winning means while the round control means is controlling the variable winning means to the first state in one of the multiple round games, the round control means changes the variable winning means to the second state, thereby ending the one round game (when 10 game balls enter the special variable winning ball device 7 in the nth jackpot round control, the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the jackpot round control is ended).
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute an update of the amount of the game value awarded by the game medium entering the variable winning means (an acquired prize ball update effect),
When the game medium enters the variable winning means, the award amount can be updated for a first period (as shown in FIG. 8-68, the winning ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds),
In the final round of the multiple rounds of play, based on a predetermined amount of the game media entering the variable winning means, after a second period has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the first state to the second state, a specific display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after ending the jackpot RD control of the final round and executing a jackpot ED performance (Part 1A, Part 1B, Part 1C) in which an image of the total number of winning balls is displayed for 4.5 seconds, a jackpot ED performance (Part 2A, Part 3B, Part 2C) informing that the jackpot has ended is executed),
The second period is longer than the first period (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds),
The effect execution means is capable of displaying a title display corresponding to the advantageous state and, after the display of the title display has ended, an operation prompt display suggesting an operation method in the advantageous state during the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information until when the variable winning means changes to the first state (as shown in FIG. 8-54, the effect control CPU 120 displays, in the jackpot FF effect, a jackpot FF effect (first part): a jackpot title display ("BONUS", etc.), and a jackpot FF effect (second part): a first instruction image (firstA instruction image, etc.) instructing a right hit in a jackpot game),
A gaming machine in which the period during which the title display is displayed is longer than the period during which the operation prompt display is displayed (as shown in Figure 8-55, etc., the execution period (4 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2)).

With this configuration, in the final round of multiple rounds of play, after the award amount is updated based on a predetermined amount of gaming media entering the variable winning means, a specific display indicating the end of the advantageous state is displayed, allowing the player to confirm the award amount update and preventing dissatisfaction with the award amount update while in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, by making the period during which the title display is displayed longer than the period during which the operation prompt display is displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the title display, and to emphasize to the player that the game is being controlled to an advantageous state.
Furthermore, by displaying the operation prompt display after the title display has finished being displayed, it is possible to make the player who has been paying attention to the title display continue to pay attention to the operation prompt display.

The gaming machine of means 45 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium (game ball) can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
a game value providing means (CPU 103 capable of providing prize balls in jackpot RD control) capable of providing game value when the game medium enters the variable winning means when the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
Display means (image display device 5);
and a performance means (first role device, second role device) that can be arranged at a position superimposed on the display means and is used for performance,
When a predetermined amount of game media enters the variable winning means while the round control means is controlling the variable winning means to the first state in one of the multiple round games, the round control means changes the variable winning means to the second state, thereby ending the one round game (when 10 game balls enter the special variable winning ball device 7 in the nth jackpot round control, the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the jackpot round control is ended).
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute an update of the amount of the game value awarded by the game medium entering the variable winning means (an acquired prize ball update effect),
When the game medium enters the variable winning means, the award amount can be updated for a first period (as shown in FIG. 8-68, the winning ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds),
In the final round of the multiple rounds of play, based on a predetermined amount of the game media entering the variable winning means, after a second period has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the first state to the second state, a specific display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after ending the jackpot RD control of the final round and executing a jackpot ED performance (Part 1A, Part 1B, Part 1C) in which an image of the total number of winning balls is displayed for 4.5 seconds, a jackpot ED performance (Part 2A, Part 3B, Part 2C) informing that the jackpot has ended is executed),
The second period is longer than the first period (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds),
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When controlled to the advantageous state, a title display (jackpot title display) corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
The title display is displayed at a display position and size that reduces the visibility of a part of the title display by the effect means (as shown in Figure 8-70 (A) , when the first and second roles are provided and the jackpot FF effect (first part) is executed, the visibility of a part (in this example, the bottom left part of the character "Yume" and the top left part of the character "B") of the jackpot title display (in this example, the characters "Yume Yume Bonus") is reduced by the role),
The error display is displayed by the presentation means at a display position and size that does not reduce the visibility of the error display (as shown in Figure 8-70 (A), even when the first and second roles are provided, neither role is installed so as to overlap the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image is not reduced by the roles), gaming machine.

With this configuration, in the final round of multiple rounds of play, after the award amount is updated based on a predetermined amount of gaming media entering the variable winning means, a specific display indicating the end of the advantageous state is displayed, allowing the player to confirm the award amount update and preventing dissatisfaction with the award amount update while in an advantageous state.

In addition, by positioning the presentation means used in the presentation so that they overlap the display means, the player can be drawn to the display means and presentation means when the presentation is being executed, and by displaying part of the title display celebrating the player being controlled to an advantageous state in a position and size that reduces its visibility due to the presentation means, the impression made on the player when the player is controlled to an advantageous state can be strengthened.
On the other hand, since the error display needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, the display position and size are set so that visibility is not reduced by the presentation means, thereby allowing the player to be accurately notified of the occurrence of an error.

The gaming machine of means 46 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium (game ball) can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
a game value providing means (CPU 103 capable of providing prize balls in jackpot RD control) capable of providing game value when the game medium enters the variable winning means when the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
Display means (image display device 5);
and a performance means (first role device, second role device) that can be arranged at a position superimposed on the display means and is used for performance,
When a predetermined amount of game media enters the variable winning means while the round control means is controlling the variable winning means to the first state in one of the multiple round games, the round control means changes the variable winning means to the second state, thereby ending the one round game (when 10 game balls enter the special variable winning ball device 7 in the nth jackpot round control, the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the jackpot round control is ended).
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute an update of the amount of the game value awarded by the game medium entering the variable winning means (an acquired prize ball update effect),
When the game medium enters the variable winning means, the award amount can be updated for a first period (as shown in FIG. 8-68, the winning ball update effect is executed for 1.5 seconds),
In the final round of the multiple rounds of play, based on a predetermined amount of the game media entering the variable winning means, after a second period has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the first state to the second state, a specific display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (as shown in Figures 8-61, 8-62, and 8-64, after ending the jackpot RD control of the final round and executing a jackpot ED performance (Part 1A, Part 1B, Part 1C) in which an image of the total number of winning balls is displayed for 4.5 seconds, a jackpot ED performance (Part 2A, Part 3B, Part 2C) informing that the jackpot has ended is executed),
The second period is longer than the first period (1.5 seconds < 4.5 seconds),
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When controlled to the advantageous state, an operation prompting display (a first instruction image (a firstA instruction image, etc.)) suggesting an operation method in the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
The operation prompt display is displayed at a display position and size that reduces the visibility of a part of the operation prompt display by the presentation means (as shown in Figure 8-70 (B) , when the first and second role devices are provided and the jackpot FF presentation (second part) is executed, the role devices reduce the visibility of a part (in this example, the lower part of the right-pointing arrow object and the lower part of the character "Hit") of the first instruction image (in this example, the right-pointing arrow object and the character "Hit");
The error display is displayed by the presentation means at a display position and size that does not reduce the visibility of the error display (as shown in Figure 8-70 (B), even when the first and second roles are provided, neither role is installed so as to overlap the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image is not reduced by the roles), gaming machine.

With this configuration, in the final round of multiple rounds of play, after the award amount is updated based on a predetermined amount of gaming media entering the variable winning means, a specific display indicating the end of the advantageous state is displayed, allowing the player to confirm the award amount update and preventing dissatisfaction with the award amount update while in an advantageous state.

In addition, by positioning the presentation means used in the presentation so that they overlap the display means, the player can be drawn to the display means and presentation means when the presentation is being executed, and by displaying a portion of the operation prompt display that suggests an operation method in an advantageous state at a display position and size that reduces visibility by the presentation means, the player is controlled to an advantageous state and the impression made when the operation prompt display is displayed can be strengthened.
On the other hand, since the error display needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, the display position and size are set so that visibility is not reduced by the presentation means, thereby allowing the player to be accurately notified of the occurrence of an error.

The gaming machine of means 47 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game that controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance,
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control it to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
When controlled in the normal state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state is shorter than the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state (as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56).
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
A specific display (jackpot title display (BONUS, Yume Yume BONUS, etc.)) corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the specific display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed superimposed on the specific display (as shown in FIG. 8-57, if a ball-out error occurs while a jackpot title display (the letters "BONUS") is being displayed, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the jackpot title display),
The specific display is composed of multiple characters (as shown in FIG. 8-57, the jackpot title display "BONUS" is composed of two or more characters),
When the error display is displayed superimposed on the specific display, the error display is displayed superimposed on at least two or more characters of the specific display (as shown in Figure 8-57, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the two characters "US" of the jackpot title display), a gaming machine.

With this configuration, variable displays are more likely to be executed in the special state than in the normal state, and the period from when a specific display result is derived as a display result for the variable display of specific identification information to when a round of play begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of play in the special state even faster, and prevents players from feeling stressed when playing in the special state.

In addition, if an error occurs while a special display is being displayed, the error display will be superimposed on the special display, making it easier for players who were paying attention to the special display to recognize the error display, allowing them to continue playing smoothly after the error occurs.

The gaming machine of means 48 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game that controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance,
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control it to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
When controlled in the normal state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state is shorter than the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state (as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56).
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, an operation prompting display (normal right-hit instruction (first A instruction image, first B instruction image) "right-hit") suggesting an operation method in the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
If an error occurs while the operation prompting display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed superimposed on the operation prompting display (as shown in FIG. 8-57, if a bulb-out error occurs while the first A instruction image is being displayed, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the first A instruction image),
The operation prompting display is composed of a plurality of characters (as shown in FIG. 8-57, the first A instruction image “Right Hit” is composed of two or more characters),
When the error display is displayed superimposed on the operation prompt display, the error display is displayed superimposed on at least two or more characters of the operation prompt display (as shown in Figure 8-57, the first error image is displayed superimposed on the three characters ``hit right'' of the first A instruction image), gaming machine.

With this configuration, variable displays are more likely to be executed in the special state than in the normal state, and the period from when a specific display result is derived as a display result for the variable display of specific identification information to when a round of play begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of play in the special state even faster, and prevents players from feeling stressed when playing in the special state.

In addition, if an error occurs while an operation prompt is being displayed, the error prompt will be superimposed on the operation prompt, making it easier for players who have been paying attention to the operation prompt to recognize the error display, allowing them to continue playing smoothly after the error occurs.

The gaming machine of means 49 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
and a round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control it to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
When controlled in the normal state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state is shorter than the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state (as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56).
In the last round of play among the plurality of rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the normal state, the period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable is shorter than the period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable in the last round of play among the plurality of rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the special state (as shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) as shown in Figure 8-64 is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds, 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode)).

With this configuration, the special state makes it easier to execute variable displays than the normal state, and the period from when a specific display result is derived as a display result for the variable display of specific identification information to when a round of play begins is shorter than in the normal state.Furthermore, the period from when the final round of play ends to when the variable display of specific identification information can be executed is shorter than in the normal state.This makes the speed of gameplay in the special state even faster, and does not cause stress to the player when playing in the special state.

The gaming machine of means 50 includes:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
and a round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control it to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
When controlled in the normal state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state is shorter than the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state (as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56).
In the last round of play among the multiple rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the normal state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means changes to the first state when controlled in the normal state is shorter than the period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable (as shown in Figures 8-61 and 8-62, the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) occurring in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (9 seconds, 19 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) occurring in the normal state (normal mode)).
In the last round of play among the multiple rounds of play in the advantageous state controlled based on the specific display result being derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when controlled in the special state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information when the game machine is controlled in the special state to when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state to when the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable is shorter (as shown in Figure 8-56, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) is shorter than the execution period (8 seconds) of the jackpot ED presentation of jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode) as shown in Figure 8-64).

With this configuration, variable displays are more likely to be executed in the special state than in the normal state, and the period from when a specific display result is derived as a display result for the variable display of specific identification information to when a round of play begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of play in the special state even faster, and prevents players from feeling stressed when playing in the special state.

In addition, in both the normal and special states, the period from when the final round of play ends until the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable is shorter than the period from when the final round of play ends until the variable display of the specific identification information becomes executable. This shortens the period until control is achieved in an advantageous state and allows the player to enjoy the afterglow of the end of the advantageous state for even longer.

The gaming machine of means 51 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game multiple times, which controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance,
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control it to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
When controlled in the normal state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state is shorter than the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state (as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56).
The effect execution means is capable of displaying a title display corresponding to the advantageous state and, after the display of the title display has ended, an operation prompt display suggesting an operation method in the advantageous state during the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information until when the variable winning means changes to the first state (as shown in FIG. 8-54, the effect control CPU 120 displays, in the jackpot FF effect, a jackpot FF effect (first part): a jackpot title display ("BONUS", etc.), and a jackpot FF effect (second part): a first instruction image (firstA instruction image, etc.) instructing a right hit in a jackpot game),
A gaming machine in which the period during which the title display is displayed is longer than the period during which the operation prompt display is displayed (as shown in Figure 8-55, etc., the execution period (4 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 1) is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation (part 2)).

With this configuration, variable displays are more likely to be executed in the special state than in the normal state, and the period from when a specific display result is derived as a display result for the variable display of specific identification information to when a round of play begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of play in the special state even faster, and prevents players from feeling stressed when playing in the special state.

Furthermore, by making the period during which the title display is displayed longer than the period during which the operation prompt display is displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the title display, and to emphasize to the player that the game is being controlled to an advantageous state.
Furthermore, by displaying the operation prompt display after the title display has finished being displayed, it is possible to make the player who has been paying attention to the title display continue to pay attention to the operation prompt display.

The gaming machine of means 52 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game that controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
Display means (image display device 5);
A performance means (first role, second role) that can be arranged at a position superimposed on the display means and is used for performance;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance,
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it can be controlled to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
When controlled in the normal state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state is shorter than the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state (as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56).
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When controlled to the advantageous state, a title display (jackpot title display) corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
The title display is displayed at a display position and size that reduces the visibility of a part of the title display by the effect means (as shown in Figure 8-70 (A) , when the first and second roles are provided and the jackpot FF effect (first part) is executed, the visibility of a part (in this example, the bottom left part of the character "Yume" and the top left part of the character "B") of the jackpot title display (in this example, the characters "Yume Yume Bonus") is reduced by the role),
The error display is displayed by the presentation means at a display position and size that does not reduce the visibility of the error display (as shown in Figure 8-70 (A), even when the first and second roles are provided, neither role is installed so as to overlap the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image is not reduced by the roles), gaming machine.

With this configuration, variable displays are more likely to be executed in the special state than in the normal state, and the period from when a specific display result is derived as a display result for the variable display of specific identification information to when a round of play begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of play in the special state even faster, and prevents players from feeling stressed when playing in the special state.

In addition, by positioning the presentation means used in the presentation so that they overlap the display means, the player can be drawn to the display means and presentation means when the presentation is being executed, and by displaying part of the title display celebrating the player being controlled to an advantageous state in a position and size that reduces its visibility due to the presentation means, the impression made on the player when the player is controlled to an advantageous state can be strengthened.
On the other hand, since the error display needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, the display position and size are set so that visibility is not reduced by the presentation means, thereby allowing the player to be accurately notified of the occurrence of an error.

The gaming machine of means 53 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of specific identification information (variable display of special symbols), and capable of controlling to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is more favorable to a player than a normal state by deriving a specific display result (jackpot) as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled to a first state (open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A round control means (CPU 103 capable of executing jackpot RD control) capable of executing a round game that controls the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state when controlled in the advantageous state;
Display means (image display device 5);
A performance means (first role, second role) that can be arranged at a position superimposed on the display means and is used for performance;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance,
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control it to a special state (time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state,
When controlled in the normal state, the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state is shorter than the period from when the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information to when the variable winning means is controlled to the first state (as shown in Figure 8-55, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the first jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) that occurs in the normal state (normal mode) is shorter than the execution period (7 seconds) of the jackpot FF presentation of the jackpot C that occurs in the time-saving state, ST state (right-hit mode), as shown in Figure 8-56).
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
When controlled to the advantageous state, an operation prompting display (a first instruction image (a firstA instruction image, etc.)) suggesting an operation method in the advantageous state can be displayed,
An error display (error image (first error image, etc.)) that notifies the user that an error has occurred can be displayed,
The operation prompt display is displayed at a display position and size that reduces the visibility of a part of the operation prompt display by the presentation means (as shown in Figure 8-70 (B) , when the first and second role devices are provided and the jackpot FF presentation (second part) is executed, the role devices reduce the visibility of a part (in this example, the lower part of the right-pointing arrow object and the lower part of the character "Hit") of the first instruction image (in this example, the right-pointing arrow object and the character "Hit");
The error display is displayed by the presentation means at a display position and size that does not reduce the visibility of the error display (as shown in Figure 8-70 (B), even when the first and second roles are provided, neither role is installed so as to overlap the error image display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the error image is not reduced by the roles), gaming machine.

With this configuration, variable displays are more likely to be executed in the special state than in the normal state, and the period from when a specific display result is derived as a display result for the variable display of specific identification information to when a round of play begins is shorter than in the normal state. This makes the speed of play in the special state even faster, and prevents players from feeling stressed when playing in the special state.

In addition, by positioning the presentation means used in the presentation so that they overlap the display means, the player can be drawn to the display means and presentation means when the presentation is being executed, and by displaying a portion of the operation prompt display that suggests an operation method in an advantageous state at a display position and size that reduces visibility by the presentation means, the player is controlled to an advantageous state and the impression made when the operation prompt display is displayed can be strengthened.
On the other hand, since the error display needs to reliably notify the player that an error has occurred, the display position and size are set so that visibility is not reduced by the presentation means, thereby allowing the player to be accurately notified of the occurrence of an error.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of specific identification information, and deriving a specific display result as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information, thereby being controllable to an advantageous state that is more advantageous to a player than a normal state,
a performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
a variable winning means that can be controlled to a first state in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
a round control means for controlling the variable winning means to change from the first state to the second state in the advantageous state, and capable of executing a round game a plurality of times;
A display means;
a performance means that can be arranged at a position superimposed on the display means and is used for performance;
After being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control to a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The presentation means includes a first presentation means and a second presentation means,
The performance execution means
In the last round of the multiple rounds of play, during a predetermined period from when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state until when the variable winning means is controlled to the special state, an addiction prevention display for preventing addiction to the game can be displayed,
During the predetermined period, a predetermined display relating to the number of gaming media acquired during the advantageous state can be displayed;
An error message can be displayed to notify the user that an error has occurred.
If an error occurs while the anti-slip display is being displayed, the error display can be displayed so as not to be superimposed on the anti-slip display,
When controlled to the advantageous state, a title display corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
When the game is controlled to be in the advantageous state, an operation prompting display can be displayed that suggests an operation method corresponding to the advantageous state,
the title display is displayed at a display position and size that reduces the visibility of a part of the title display by the second effect producing means,
the error display is displayed by the first effect means and the second effect means at a display position and size that do not reduce the visibility of the error display,
The predetermined display is larger than the anti-slip display,
the operation prompting display includes a first operation prompting display displayed on the display means and a second operation prompting display displayed on the display means,
the first operation prompting display is displayed at a display position and size such that visibility of a part of the first operation prompting display is reduced by the first effecting means, and such that visibility of a part of the first operation prompting display is not reduced by the second effecting means;
the second operation prompting display is displayed by the first effect means and the second effect means at a display position and size that do not reduce visibility of a part of the second operation prompting display;
A gaming machine characterized by: